Для практически каждого из владельцев автомобиля CLK (W208) не секрет, что литература по ремонту и обслуживанию данного автомобиля это проблема, ибо такой на русском языке попросту нигде нет!
Однако, мы хорошо знаем что практически по всем узлам и агрегатам наши автомобили полностью унифицированы с седанами и универсалами серии W202 (C-class 1993-2000 годов выпуска). А стало быть, книги по ремонту этих автомобилей нам полностью подходят.
Полный размер
W202 — наш прямой родственник
Я для себя купил при помощи родственников в Украине две такие книги. В Молдове раньше было пруд-пруди книг по ремонту в автомагазинах, а теперь они все поисчезали и стали дефицитом.
В принципе, книги можно скачать в электронном виде, но я люблю держать в руках бумагу.
Скачать бесплатно можно тут: w202club.ru/a0501.html
Я собственно это и сделал и потом, проанализировав содержимое, выбрал какую именно из них купить в бумажном виде. Это очень удобно. Ненужно покупать «кота в мешке». Имеешь полное представление о покупаемой книге, словно сам находишься в книжном магазине и берешь книгу с полки.
Выбрал я вот эту:
Издательство Haynes (уже это говорит о многом).
Книга в твердом (!) переплете. С хорошими четкими иллюстрациями (сканы этой книги в интернете выглядят намного хуже реальности). С хорошим внятным описанием всех процессов.
Вот тут есть краткий видеообзор этой книги:
И еще взял одну книгу по двигателям, которые устанавливались на W202 и W208
Вот такую:
Эта книга уже в мягкой обложке, как и большинство книг по ремонту. Но по содержанию тоже весьма полезна.
Обошлось мне все примерно в 27 Евро в валютном эквиваленте, по отношению к моей местной валюте. Правда, при покупке, я немного попал…
Когда я книги заказывал родне (покупались они в Украинских Гривнах) и в переводе на Молдавские Леи это была одна сумма. А когда они приехали в гости и привезли мне книги и мне пришлось отдавать им деньги за эти книги (в Гривнах же) то это была уже другая сумма. Дело в том что всего за одну неделю, с момента моей просьбы родственникам купить и привезти мне эти книги, было принято решение об открытии для граждан Украины безвизового режима в Евросоюз, и курс Гривны резко стрельнул вверх по отношению к Молдавскому Лею и цена для меня выросла почти в 1,5 раза.
Но я все равно доволен.
Хорошие книги — рекомендую всем!
Каталог руководств по обслуживанию и ремонту автомобилей самых популярных марок
© 2022 manuals4car.ru Все права защищены.
При упоминании использовании материалов активная ссылка на manuals4car.ru обязательна.
-
ВАЖНО! Задавая технические вопросы, указывайте VIN в сообщении
-
Автор темы
qruiser
-
Дата начала
20 Фев 2009
-
#1
Последнее редактирование: 18 Июл 2010
-
#4
инструкция по ремонту w208
Помогите найти,плз,инструкцию по ремонту w208. Книжка по эксплуатации уже есть. Заранее спасибо.
-
#5
Устройство и ремонт Mercedes-Benz clk-200 kompressor
Помогите найти книгу по устройству и ремонту данной модели.
-
#6
clk230 1998г
как меняется антифриз
-
#7
Парни срочно треба Момент затяжки болтов на головке блока двигателя и последовательность..Кто знает подскажите плизз
-
#8
208 clk 1999
подскажите для чего есть замок под рулем ,не догоняю, поворачиваю замок ходит вверх и вниз ,для чего ?
-
#9
подскажите для чего есть замок под рулем ,не догоняю, поворачиваю замок ходит вверх и вниз ,для чего ?
Вероятно это нештатный замок капота.Там не просто крутить надо,а тянуть на себя в открытом положении за ключ.
Самая большая посещаемость
Пользователей:
34 от 7 03 23
Гостей:
889 от 2 03 23
Больше всего посетителей было 905 , от 2 03 23
- Темы
- 58.494
- Сообщения
- 640.277
- Пользователи
- 203.004
- Новый пользователь
- Goodzilla
62 посетителя на сайте. Из них:
Пользователи1
Гости39
Роботы22
Список пользователей
dardzi
Был(a) в сети 23 минуты назад
aleks13
Был(a) в сети 52 минуты назад
Heckfy
Был(a) в сети 1 час назад
idle
Был(a) в сети 1 час назад
Zubrik
Был(a) в сети 2 часа назад
bob74
Был(a) в сети 3 часа назад
alexti
Был(a) в сети 3 часа назад
Salhi
Был(a) в сети 4 часа назад
vcvcvc
Был(a) в сети 5 часов назад
stas96
Был(a) в сети 5 часов назад
Mitsuba
Был(a) в сети 6 часов назад
Sergo77
Был(a) в сети 8 часов назад
VLRy00
Был(a) в сети 8 часов назад
bayan83
Был(a) в сети 9 часов назад
djlong
Был(a) в сети 9 часов назад
Gridox
Был(a) в сети 9 часов назад
Edd-y
Был(a) в сети 11 часов назад
foksxXx
Был(a) в сети 12 часов назад
Magua
Был(a) в сети 12 часов назад
Alin
Был(a) в сети 18 часов назад
tpm98
Был(a) в сети 19 часов назад
Kokocyk
Был(a) в сети 20 часов назад
djek1ng
Был(a) в сети 20 часов назад
dirus
Был(a) в сети 20 часов назад
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS ual
WWW.MA
CLKOperator
NUALS
Coupé’s Man
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS
CLK 430CLK 55 AMG
WWW.MANUA
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
edes-Benz.
y name. Further, it exemplifies your desire e years of service.
raftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of make a small investment of your time:
t to your vehicle where it will be handy for
re designed to acquaint you with the
hey are designed to help improve the safety
WWW.MANUALS
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Merc
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our companto own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provid
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and cownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to
• Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return iyour reference.
• Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They aoperation of your Mercedes-Benz.
• Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. Tof the vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
DaimlerChrysler AG
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Co
Introduction Panic button …………………………… 33Mechanical keys …………………….. 33
………… 34
………… 36 ………. 37
………… 37
………… 38
………… 40
………….41
………… 42
………… 44
………… 45
………….51
………… 52
………… 54
………… 55
………… 56
………… 58
………… 58
………… 59
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ………………..65
Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed ………65
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) …………………………..66
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ………………………..66
Airbags ……………………………………….67Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag ……………………………….73Infant and child restraint systems ……………………..75
Adjusting telescoping steering column ……………………..78
Inside rear view mirror ………………79Exterior rear view mirrors ………….80Instrument cluster ………………………84Indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ………………….86Multifunction steering wheel,
multifunction display ……………..90
WWW.MANUA1ntents
Product information …………………….. 7Operator’s manual ……………………….. 8Where to find it ………………………….. 13Reporting Safety Defects ……………. 15
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls …………… 18Center console …………………………20Overhead control panel …………… 21
Operation
Vehicle keys ………………………………..24Start lock-out ………………………………27General notes on the
central locking system ……………27Central locking system ……………….28
Radio frequency and infrared remote control …………………………28Opening and closing windows and sliding/pop-up roof from outside …………………………………….32
Doors ……………………………….Central locking switch ……..
Automatic central lockingEmergency unlocking in
case of accident …………..Trunk ……………………………….Trunk lid release switch ….Trunk lid emergency
release …………………………Antitheft alarm system …….Tow-away alarm ……………….Power seats, front …………….
Front head restraints ……Rear head restraints ……..
Backrest …………………………..Multicontour seat …………….Heated seats …………………….Seat belts and integrated
restraint system …………..Seat belts …………………………
Seat belt nonusage warning system …………….
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
2Contents
116117118119
1212224
2425252627
2728
294749
Interior lighting ……………………….. 151Rear window sunshade …………….. 152Sun visors ………………………………… 152Illuminated vanity mirrors ………..153Interior ……………………………………..153Storage compartments,
armrest and cup holder ………..153Glove box ……………………………….154
Ashtrays ……………………………………157Lighter ………………………………………159Enlarged cargo area –
split folding rear seat backrest …………………………160
Loading instructions …………………162Cargo tie down rings …………………163Parcel net in front
passenger footwell ……………….. 164Telephone, general ……………………164Cellular telephone …………………….165Garage door opener …………………..166Ski sack ……………………………………. 170
WWW.MANUALS
Trip and main odometer, vehicle speed, FSS and engine oil level indicator ………..94
Audio systems …………………………….95Radio ……………………………………….95CD player …………………………………96Cassette player ………………………..97
Telephone ……………………………………98Telephone book ……………………….98Redialing ……………………………….100Incoming call …………………………102
Navigation system …………………….. 103Trip computer …………………………… 104Malfunction message
memory ……………………………….. 106Individual settings …………………….108Setting the audio volume ……………110Flexible service system
(FSS) ………………………………………111Engine oil level indicator ……………114Engine oil consumption ……………..115
Exterior lamp switch ………………….Night security illumination ……….Headlamp cleaning system ………..Combination switch …………………..Hazard warning flasher
switch ……………………………………Automatic climate control ………… 1
Display and controls …………….. 1Basic setting — automatic mode ……………………. 1Economy ……………………………….. 1Special settings …………………….. 1Rear window defroster ………….. 1Air recirculation …………………… 1Residual engine heat utilization ……………………………… 1Dust filter ……………………………… 1
Audio and telephone, operation ……………………………… 1
Power windows ………………………… 1Sliding/pop-up roof ………………….. 1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Co
Driving Driving off …………………………….. 205Parking …………………………………. 205
………. 206
………. 209
………. 209
………..210
………..211
………..211
………..212
………..215
………..217 ………..219
………. 223
………. 225
Instrument cluster display
Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ………………..228
On-board diagnostic system Check engine malfunction indicator lamp ………………………..228Brake warning lamp ………………229Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp ………………………..230Fuel reserve and fuel cap placement warning ………………..230Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp ……………231BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp ………………………..231ABS malfunction indicator lamp ………………………..231Telescoping steering column – indicator lamp ………………………..232Seat belt warning lamp ………….232
WWW.MANUA3ntents
Control and operation of radio transmitters ………………… 176
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) …………………………… 177
Maintenance ……………………………..177Catalytic converter …………………… 178Emission control ……………………….179Tele Aid ……………………………………. 180Steering lock …………………………….. 190Starting and turning off
the engine ……………………………. 192Automatic transmission …………… 193Parking brake ……………………………202Driving instructions ………………….203
Drive sensibly – save fuel ………203Drinking and driving ……………..203Pedals …………………………………….203Power assistance ……………………204Brakes ……………………………………204
Tires ……………………………..Snow chains …………………Winter driving instructions ………………….Deep water ……………………Passenger compartment .Traveling abroad …………..
Cruise control ………………….Brake assist system
(BAS) …………………………..Antilock brake system
(ABS) …………………………..Electronic stability program
(ESP) ……………………………What you should know
at the gas station …………Check regularly and
before a long trip …………
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
4Contents
424243
44444546
4848
48495153
545455
Windshield washer / headlamp cleaning system ……………………256
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio …………………..256
Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment …………….257
Vehicle jack ……………………………….258Wheels ………………………………………259
Tire replacement ……………………259Rotating wheels ……………………..260
Spare wheel ……………………………… 261Changing wheels ………………………262Tire inflation pressure ………………267Battery ………………………………………268Jump starting …………………………….270Towing the vehicle …………………….272
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ……………….274
Exterior lamps …………………………..275Headlamp assembly ………………. 276Taillamp assemblies ………………278
Adjusting headlamp aim ……………280
WWW.MANUALS
Malfunction and indicator lamps in the center console …………….232
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ………………………..232
Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display ……………233
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) ………………234DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) ……………………234BATTERY/ALTERNATOR ………..235ABS-SYSTEM ………………………….236BRAKE ASSIST ………………………236BRAKE LINING WEAR …………..237BRAKE FLUID ………………………..237PARKING BRAKE …………………..238ENGINE FAN ………………………….238COOLANT (coolant level) ………………………..239COOLANT TEMP. (coolant temperature) …………….240LIGHTING SYSTEM ………………..241
LIGHT SENSOR …………………….. 2STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. ………. 2ENGINE OIL LEVEL ………………. 2ELEC. STABIL. PROGRAM. (Electronic stability program) ………………………………. 2REMOVE KEY ……………………….. 2WASHER FLUID ……………………. 2TELE AID ………………………………. 2
Practical hints
First aid kit ………………………………. 2Shelf below rear window ………….. 2Stowing things in
the vehicle …………………………… 2Fuses ……………………………………….. 2Hood ………………………………………… 2Checking engine oil level …………. 2Automatic transmission
fluid level …………………………….. 2Coolant level …………………………….. 2
Adding coolant ……………………… 2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Co
Changing batteries in the electronic main key ………………283
Vehicle care
………. 292
………. 293
………. 293
………. 293
………. 294
………. 294
………. 294
………. 294
Window cleaning …………………..295Wiper blade ……………………………295Light alloy wheels ………………….295Instrument cluster …………………295Steering wheel and gear selector lever ………………….295Cup holder ……………………………..296Seat belts ……………………………….296Hard plastic trim items ………….296Headliner and shelf below rear window …………………………..296Upholstery ……………………………..296Plastic and rubber parts …………296
WWW.MANUA5ntents
Synchronizing remote control ……………………….285
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof ……………….286
Manual release for fuel filler flap ………………………..287
Replacing wiper blade insert …………………………………….287
Trunk lamp ……………………………….289Roof rack …………………………………..289
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ……………….
Power washer ……………….Tar stains ……………………..Paintwork, painted body components ………………….Engine cleaning ……………Vehicle washing ……………Ornamental moldings …..Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses …………
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
6Contents
07
0707
08080909
311
Index
Index ………………………………………… 313
WWW.MANUALS
Technical data
Spare parts service ……………………298Warranty coverage …………………….298Identification labels …………………..299Layout of poly-V-belt drive …………300Technical data …………………………..301Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. –
capacities ……………………………..305Engine oils ………………………………..307
Engine oil additives …………………. 3Air conditioner
refrigerant …………………………… 3Brake fluid ……………………………….. 3Premium unleaded
gasoline ……………………………….. 3Fuel requirements …………………… 3Gasoline additives ……………………. 3Coolants …………………………………… 3Consumer information ………………
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Product information
rsion parts and accessories
heir special
ore cannot be held responsible tion by governmental or other sely affect the safety, performance
ories approved by us are available prehensive information, also on ill be performed.
WWW.MANUA7roduction
Kindly observe the following in your own best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conveexplicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and tsuitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for other products and thereffor them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorizaagencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adveror reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessat your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive compermissible technical modifications, and where proper installation w
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
8Introduction
e you to read it carefully and familiarize
llow the instructions and warnings icle or personal injury to you or others. e Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ual. Therefore, you may find explanations ons about the operation of any equipment, per procedures.
on about the warranties covering your
anty
WWW.MANUALS
Operator’s manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urgyourself with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to focontained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehVehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by th
Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manfor optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questiyour authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the pro
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed informatiMercedes-Benz, including:
• New Car Limited Warranty,
• Emission System Warranty,
• Emission Performance Warranty,
• California, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warr(California, Massachusetts, and Vermont only),
• State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles
hicle or a refund of the purchase price, if ls to conform the vehicle to its express warranties e year or 12 000 miles from original delivery of
a retail buyer (1) if the vehicle is out of service by l of more than 30 calendar days or (2) the same imes and you have at least once directly d have given us an opportunity to perform the cedes-Benz Regional Office listed in the
hich should be performed at regular intervals.
to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for or you.
WWW.MANUA9roduction
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your veMercedes-Benz USA, LLC or its authorized Mercedes-Benz Center faiafter a reasonable number of repair attempts during the period of onthe vehicle. A reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed forreason of repair of substantial nonconformities for a cumulative totasubstantial non-conformity has been subject to repair four or more tnotified us in writing of the need to repair the non-conformity anrepair ourselves. Notifications should be sent to the nearest MerService and Warranty Information Booklet.
Maintenance
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work w
Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicleservice. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
10Introduction
technical help in the event of a breakdown.
hours a day, 365 days a year.
Program brochure in your glove box.
ice” found in the Service and Warranty nter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR MERCedes, st that we can contact you should the need
ke it available to the next operator.
of Used Car” found in the Service and Center (in the USA) at .
WWW.MANUALS
Roadside assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Representatives 24
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address NotInformation Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Ceor Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interearise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to ma
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance1-800—FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada
are that:
le,
be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage
per fuel can cause engine damage.
nder our European Delivery Program. For details,
a:-Benz Canada, Inc. Delivery Departmentton Avenue East
Ontario M4G 2L5
WWW.MANUA11roduction
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aw
• Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily availab
• unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may notthe catalysts,
• gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and impro
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe uconsult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
In the USA: In CanadMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350
MercedesEuropean849 EglinToronto,
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
12Introduction
ding that we reserve the right to make descriptions in this Operator’s Manual
nstructions wherever necessary. Since they slightly from the actual equipment of your
Operator’s Manual, your authorized ting procedures.
should be kept with the vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS
We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanchanges in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations andmight differ from your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating iare special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may varyvehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and opera
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Where to find it
can be operated from the driver’s seat.
ation.
e instrument cluster with brief instructions.
mergency.
as well as consumer information such as fuels,
equipment.
WWW.MANUA13roduction
The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections:
• Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that
• Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its oper
• Driving: Important information on driving.
• Instrument cluster display: Displays and indicator lamps on th
• Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an e
• Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle.
• Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehiclecoolants, lubricants etc. is contained here.
• Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly.
Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s
Explanation of color used:
Warning notices for the protection of yourself and others appear on red background.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
14Introduction
arly one that you believe may affect thorized Mercedes-Benz Center to atter is not handled to your nz Center management, or if
WWW.MANUALS
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particulits safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your auhave the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the msatisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benecessary contact us at the following addresses:
In the USA: Client Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
For the USA only:The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
966”.
cause a crash or could cause injury or way Traffic Safety Administration C.
estigation, and if it finds that a safety and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA ou, your retailer, or Mercedes-Benz USA,
otline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 A, U.S. Department of Transportation,
ation about motor vehicle safety from
WWW.MANUA15roduction
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could death, you should immediately inform the National High(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LL
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an invdefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall cannot become involved in individual problems between yLLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety H(or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSWashington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informthe Hotline.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WS
WWW.MANUALS.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS 17Contents – Instruments and controls
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls …………… 18Center console …………………………20Overhead control panel …………… 21
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
18Instruments and controls
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
WWW.MANUALS
Instruments and controls
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ins
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
For more detailed descriptions see index on page 313. 13 Center air outlets, adjustable
r volume control for center air outlets
ft front seat heater switch, see page 56
adlamp washer switch, see page 118
itch for rear seat head restraints, see page 52
zard warning flasher switch, see page 121
ntral locking switch, see page 36
itch for tow-away alarm, see page 44icator lamp for antitheft alarm system, see
ge 42
ht front seat heater switch, see page 56
tomatic climate control, see page 122 ar window defroster switch, see page 126
ve box (illuminated with electronic key in ering lock position 1 or 2), see page 154
dio system, see page 129
rage compartment
htray with lighter, see page 157
WWW.MANUA19truments and controls
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
For adjustment of air outlets, refer to automatic climate control, see page 122.
1 Side air outlet, adjustable
2 Air volume control for side air outlet
3 Exterior lamp switch, see page 116
4 Parking brake release, see page 202
5 Parking brake pedal, see page 202
6 Hood lock release, see page 251
7 Combination switch, see page 119
8 Cruise control switch, see page 212
9 Multifunction steering wheel, see page 90Horn (with electronic key in steering lock position 1 or 2)
10 Instrument cluster, see page 84
11 Voice recognition system switch, see separate operating instructions
12 Steering lock with ignition/starter switch, see page 190
14 Ai
15 Le
16 He
17 Sw
18 Ha
19 Ce
20 SwIndpa
21 Rig
22 AuRe
23 Gloste
24 Au
25 Sto
26 As
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
20Instruments and controls
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
rol switch, see page 221
mode selector switch, see page 200
r rear window sunshade, see page 152
ff indicator lamp, see page 232
r window switch, see page 147
release switch, see page 40
justment switch, see page 80
er window switch, see page 147
WWW.MANUALS
Center console 1 ESP cont
2 Program
3 Switch fo
4 Airbag O
5 Left powe
6 Trunk lid
7 Mirror ad
8 Right pow
P68.10-2192-27
2
5
1
6 7 8
4
3
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ins
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Overhead control panel 1 Interior lighting, see page 151
ding/pop-up roof, see page 149
le Aid (emergency call system), see page 180
nds-free microphone for Tele Aid, telephone and ice recognition system.
ar view mirror, see page 79
rage door opener, see page 166
WWW.MANUA21truments and controls
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
2 Sli
3 Te
4 Havo
5 Re
6 Ga
1
1
6
P82.00-2049-27
5
2
3 4
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
22Contents – Operation
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
45.5152545556
5858
59
65
65
66
6667
73
Infant and child restraint systems ……………………..75
Adjusting telescoping steering column ……………………..78
Inside rear view mirror ………………79Exterior rear view mirrors ………….80Instrument cluster ………………………84Indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ………………….86Multifunction steering wheel,
multifunction display ……………..90Trip and main odometer,
vehicle speed, FSS and engine oil level indicator ………..94
Audio systems …………………………….95Radio ……………………………………….95CD player …………………………………96Cassette player ………………………..97
Telephone ……………………………………98Telephone book ……………………….98Redialing ……………………………….100Incoming call …………………………102
Navigation system ……………………..103Trip computer ……………………………104
WWW.MANUALS
Operation
Vehicle keys ………………………………..24Start lock-out ………………………………27General notes on the
central locking system ……………27Central locking system ……………….28
Radio frequency and infrared remote control …………………………28Opening and closing windows and sliding/pop-up roof from outside …………………………………….32Panic button …………………………….33Mechanical keys ………………………33
Doors …………………………………………..34Central locking switch ………………..36
Automatic central locking ……….37Emergency unlocking in
case of accident ………………………37Trunk ………………………………………….38Trunk lid release switch ……………..40Trunk lid emergency
release …………………………………… 41Antitheft alarm system ……………….42Tow-away alarm …………………………..44
Power seats, front ……………………….Front head restraints ………………Rear head restraints ………………..
Backrest ……………………………………..Multicontour seat ……………………….Heated seats ……………………………….Seat belts and integrated
restraint system ……………………..Seat belts ……………………………………
Seat belt nonusage warning system ……………………….
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system ……………….
Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed ………
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ………………………….
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) ……………………….
Airbags ……………………………………….Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag ……………………………….
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Co
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Malfunction message memory ……………………………….. 106
Economy ……………………………….. 125Special settings …………………….. 125
………. 126
………. 127
………. 127
………. 128
………. 129
………. 147
………. 149
………..151
………..152
………..152
………..153
………..153
Storage compartments, armrest and cup holder ………..153
Glove box ……………………………….154Ashtrays ……………………………………157Lighter ………………………………………159Enlarged cargo area –
split folding rear seat backrest …………………………160
Loading instructions …………………162Cargo tie down rings …………………163Parcel net in front
passenger footwell ……………….. 164Telephone, general ……………………164Cellular telephone …………………….165Garage door opener …………………..166Ski sack ……………………………………. 170
WWW.MANUA23ntents – Operation
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Individual settings …………………….108Setting the audio volume ……………110Flexible service system
(FSS) ………………………………………111Engine oil level indicator ……………114Engine oil consumption ……………..115Exterior lamp switch ………………….116Night security illumination ……….117Headlamp cleaning system ………..118Combination switch …………………..119Hazard warning flasher
switch …………………………………… 121Automatic climate control …………122
Display and controls ………………124Basic setting — automatic mode ……………………..124
Rear window defroster ….Air recirculation …………..Residual engine heat utilization ……………………..Dust filter ……………………..
Audio and telephone, operation ……………………..
Power windows ………………..Sliding/pop-up roof ………….Interior lighting ……………….Rear window sunshade ……Sun visors ………………………..Illuminated vanity mirrors Interior …………………………….
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
24Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ng the vehicle always remove the ey from the steering lock, and lock your not leave children unattended in the
ith access to an unlocked vehicle. ed use of vehicle equipment may cause sonal injury.
WWW.MANUALS
Vehicle keys
Included with your vehicle are:
• 2 electronic main keys with integrated radio frequency and infrared remote controls plus removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two electronic main keys are a different color to help distinguish it.
• 1 electronic reserve key without remote control functions, plus removable mechanical key.
Warning!
When leavielectronic kvehicle. Do vehicle, or wUnsupervisserious per
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Electronic main key When using the mechanical key (2) for lock operations, it can be removed by sliding it out of the remote control.
o, move locking tab (3) to the right and slide the nical key (2) in direction of arrow (4).
mote control transmitter is located in the nic main key.
frared receivers are located in the door handles.
e the mechanical key from the electronic main en using valet parking service. To prevent access k or storage compartments lock them separately tain the mechanical key.
ge 38 for separate locking of trunk and page 154 king of glove box.
WWW.MANUA25ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The electronic main key has an integrated radio frequency and infrared remote control, plus removable mechanical key.
The remote control (1) operates all locks on the vehicle.
The mechanical key (2) works only in the driver’s door, trunk, and storage compartment locks.
To do smecha
The reelectro
The in
Notes:
Removkey whto trunand re
See pafor loc
P80.35-2031-26
1
3
4
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
26Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ic reserve key (1) works only in the steering re no batteries inside the electronic reserve
cal key (2) works only in the driver’s door, orage compartment locks.
echanical key (2), remove it from its serve key (1).
nd that you carry the electronic reserve hanical key with you and keep it in a safe ur wallet) so that it is always handy. Never ctronic reserve key in the vehicle.
placement keys
is equipped with a theft deterrent locking ring a special key manufacturing process. reasons, replacement keys can only be
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
WWW.MANUALS
Electronic reserve key
The electronic reserve key is without remote control functions, but with removable mechanical key.
The electronlock. There akey.
The mechanitrunk, and st
To use the melectronic re
Note:
We recommekey plus mecplace (e.g. yoleave the ele
Obtaining re
Your vehicle system requiFor security obtained from
P80.35-2036-26
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Start lock-out General notes on the central locking system
lectronic key is inserted in the steering lock, the cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote
l.
ehicle cannot be locked or unlocked:
m transmitter eye at a receiver of either door ndle. Check the batteries of the electronic main y, see page 283 or to synchronize the remote
trol, see page 285.
e the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door. start the engine, insert the electronic main key in steering lock. There could be a slight delay until electronic main key can be turned in the ering lock.
tant!
unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical e exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will .
cel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the g lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the nic main key.
WWW.MANUA27ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Important!
Removing the electronic key from the steering lock activates the start lock-out. The engine cannot be started.
Inserting the electronic key in the steering lock deactivates the start lock-out.
Note:
In case the engine cannot be started (vehicle’s battery is in order), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
If the evehiclecontro
If the v
• Aihakecon
• UsTothetheste
Impor
When key, thsound
To cansteerinelectro
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
28Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
button
king
locking
ning trunk (if not separately locked)
battery check (see page 283 for changing if it does not light up briefly)
utton
ter eye
ab for mechanical key
P80.35-2032-26
2
4
3
5
1
WWW.MANUALS
Central locking system
Radio frequency and infrared remote control
The electronic main key has an integrated radio frequency and infrared remote control.
Due to the extended operational range of the remote control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button. If one of the transmit buttons is pressed, the battery check lamp lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are in order. See page 283 for checking batteries.
The vehicle doors, trunk and fuel filler flap can be centrally locked and unlocked via remote control.
Opening and closing the windows and sliding/pop-up roof remotely can only be done with the infrared portion of the remote control. Aim transmitter eye at a receiver (6 or 7), press and hold transmit button Œ or ‹.
With vehicle centrally locked, the trunk can also be opened by using the remote control.
If the electronic key is inserted in steering lock, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked, and the trunk lid cannot be opened with the remote control.
1 Transmit
‹ Loc
Œ Un
Š Ope
2 Lamp forbatteries
3 PANIC b
4 Transmit
5 Locking t
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
rared receiver in passenger door handle
WWW.MANUA29ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
6 Infrared receiver in driver’s door handle 7 Inf
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
30Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
seconds of unlocking with the remote er door or trunk is opened, the electronic erted in the steering lock, or the central h is not activated, the vehicle will lock.
it button ‹ once. All turn signal lamps imes to indicate that the vehicle is locked.
t blink three times, a door or trunk is not ed.
cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing button, then it may be necessary to change in the electronic main key (if ok, battery n electronic main key will light briefly g transmit button) or to synchronize the
ol, see page 283 and 285.
WWW.MANUALS
Locking and unlocking with remote control
Unlocking:
Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked.
The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of unlocking modes (see below):
Selective unlocking mode –Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door and fuel filler flap.Press transmit button Œ twice to unlock both doors, fuel filler flap, and trunk.
Global unlocking mode –Press transmit button Œ once to unlock both doors, fuel filler flap, and trunk.
Notes:
If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will remain locked, see page 38.
The presently active unlocking mode (selective or global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle with the remote control (see below for changing mode).
If within 40control, neithkey is not inslocking switcautomatically
Locking:
Press transmblink three t
If they do noproperly clos
Note:
If the vehiclethe transmitthe batteriescheck lamp iwhen pressinremote contr
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Choosing global or selective mode on remote control Important!
place remote control in trunk since trunk is when the lid is closed if the vehicle is centrally .
runk was previously locked separately, it will locked, see page 38.
WWW.MANUA31ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Press and hold transmit buttons ‹ and Œ simultaneously for approx. 6 seconds to reprogram the remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times indicating the completed mode change.
Opening the trunk
The trunk lid will swing open automatically. You should always make sure there is sufficient clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft. (1.8 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Press transmit button Š until trunk lid is open.
Do notlockedlocked
Note:
If the tremain
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
32Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
s and sliding/pop-up roof cannot be omatically by pressing the transmit button control then it may be necessary to change in the electronic main key (if ok, battery n electronic main key will light briefly g transmit button), or to synchronize the
ol, see page 283 and 285.
te the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if possibility of anyone being harmed by or closing procedure.
procedure causes potential danger, the an be immediately halted by releasing control button. To reverse direction of ress Œ for opening or ‹ for
WWW.MANUALS
Opening and closing windows and sliding/pop-up roof from outside
Aim transmitter eye of remote control at a door receiver.
To open:
Continue to press transmit button Œ after unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to open after approx. 1 second.
To interrupt opening procedure, release transmit button.
To close:
Continue to press transmit button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after approx. 1 second.
To interrupt closing procedure, release transmit button.
Note:
If the windowoperated autof the remotethe batteriescheck lamp iwhen pressinremote contr
Warning!
Never operathere is thethe opening
In case the procedure cthe remote movement pclosing.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Panic button Note:
eration in the USA only: This device complies art 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules. ion is subject to the following two conditions:
s device may not cause harmful interference, and
s device must accept any interference received, ing interference that may cause undesired ion.
ING: Changes or modification not expressly ed by party responsible for compliance could void
er’s authority to operate the equipment.
nical keys
echanical keys work only in the driver’s door, and storage compartment locks.
echanical key does not operate the central locking or antitheft alarm system.
el filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with chanical key.
WWW.MANUA33ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps will operate for approximately 3 minutes.
To deactivate press button (1) again, or insert electronic key in steering lock.
For opwith POperat
(1) Thi
(2) thiincludoperat
WARNapprovthe us
Mecha
The mtrunk,
Notes:
The msystem
The futhe me
P80.35-2035-26
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
34Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
cal key does not operate the central locking titheft alarm system.
ck the driver’s door with the mechanical lock button should move down.
er door must be locked with the door lock driver’s door can only be locked when it is
1 123
WWW.MANUALS
Doors
1 Opening – pull handle
2 Unlocking driver’s door
3 Locking driver’s door
4 Individual door from inside:
• Push lock button down to lock.
• Pull inside door handle to unlock.
Important!
The mechanisystem or an
When you lokey, the door
The passengbutton – the closed.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
To unlock, pull inside door handle and turn mechanical key in driver’s door lock to position 2.
unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical e exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will .
cel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the g lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the nic main key.
WWW.MANUA35ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
alarm. When opening a door while the central locking system is in the:
• selective unlocking mode, only that individual door is unlocked. The remaining door, the trunk and fuel filler flap remain locked,
• global unlocking mode, both doors, the trunk and fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Notes:
When opening a door, the door window lowers slightly. After closing the door, the window closes again.
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system the doors can be locked and unlocked individually.
To lock, push down lock button and turn mechanical key in driver’s door lock to position 3. In addition lock the trunk.
When key, thsound
To cansteerinelectro
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
36Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
was previously locked with the central h, while in the global remote control mode, vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened de.
was previously locked with the remote oors and trunk cannot be unlocked with cking switch.
has previously been locked from the ing a door with the inside door handle will
larm. To cancel the alarm, insert the y in the steering lock or press button Œ e electronic main key.
r flap cannot be locked or unlocked with cking switch.
ng the vehicle always remove the ey from the steering lock, and lock your not leave children unattended in the
ith access to an unlocked vehicle. ed use of vehicle equipment may cause sonal injury.
WWW.MANUALS
Central locking switch
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
The central locking switch is located in the center console.
The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central locking switch, if both doors are closed.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch, while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked.
If the vehiclelocking switcthe completefrom the insi
Notes:
If the vehiclecontrol, the dthe central lo
If the vehicleoutside, opentrigger the aelectronic keor ‹ on th
The fuel fillethe central lo
Warning!
When leavielectronic kvehicle. Do vehicle, or wUnsupervisserious per
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Automatic central locking If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the automatic central
g activated, the door will again be automatically at speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
tant!
towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a ometer test stand, please, note the following:
he automatic central locking activated and the nic key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle
will lock if the left front wheel as well as the right heel spin at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph /h) or more.
vent the vehicle door locks from locking, ate the automatic central locking.
ency unlocking in case of accident
ors unlock automatically a short time after a deceleration is detected, such as in a collision intended to aid rescue and exit).
g on rough roads may cause the vehicle to unlock. ssary, the vehicle can be locked again with the l locking switch, see page 36.
WWW.MANUA37ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The central locking switch also operates the automatic central locking.
With the automatic central locking system activated, the doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
To activate:
With electronic key in steering lock position 2 hold upper portion of switch (1) for a minimum of 5 seconds.
To deactivate:
With electronic key in steering lock position 2 hold lower portion of switch (2) for a minimum of 5 seconds.
Notes:
If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch after activating the automatic central locking, and neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked even at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
lockinlocked
Impor
When dynam
With telectrodoors rear w(15 km
To predeactiv
Emerg
The dostrong(this is
DrivinIf nececentra
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
38Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
osition – push to open (arrow)
g
locking of trunk – remove mechanical key sition.
WWW.MANUALS
Trunk
When the trunk is separately locked, it remains locked when centrally unlocking the vehicle.
To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave only the electronic main key less its mechanical key with the vehicle.
Notes:
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking system or antitheft alarm system.
When unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound.
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the steering lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the electronic main key.
0 Neutral p
1 Unlockin
2 Separatein this po
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Notes:
trunk lid using handle (1) and close it with hands flat on trunk lid. Please remember to keep your out of the space between the lid and the vehicle.
P88.50-2009-26
1
WWW.MANUA39ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system the trunk can be unlocked individually.
To unlock and open the trunk lid, turn mechanical key to position 1, hold and push to open.
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 287.
Important!
Do not place mechanical key inside trunk, since trunk is locked when the lid is closed if the vehicle has been previously centrally locked.
Lower placedfingers
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
40Central locking system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
height clearance of 5.9 ft. (1.8 m) is pen the trunk lid.
runk, the vehicle must be at standstill. Pull until trunk lid is open.
lamp in the switch remains on with trunk
n also be opened by using the remote s Š button.
cannot be opened by the switch or the ol when previously locked separately with al key. To open, see page 38.
cannot be opened with the trunk lid h when the vehicle was previously locked ote control. To unlock vehicle with the ol, see page 28.
WWW.MANUALS
Trunk lid release switch
The switch is located on the center console.
A minimum required to o
To open the tup on switch
The indicatorlid open.
Notes:
The trunk cacontrol. Pres
The trunk lidremote contrthe mechanic
The trunk lidrelease switcwith the remremote contr
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ce
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Trunk lid emergency release Note:
ergency release button (1) only unlocks and the trunk while the vehicle is standing.
tant!
ergency trunk lid release button (1) does not he trunk lid, if:
vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected,
trunk lid was previously locked separately with mechanical key, see page 38.
nation of the emergency release button (1):
tton will blink for 30 minutes after opening the
tton will blink for 60 minutes after closing the
WWW.MANUA41ntral locking system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The emergency release button (1) is located in the trunk lid.
Briefly press emergency release button (1).All doors, the fuel filler flap, and the trunk unlock; and the trunk lid opens.
The emopens
Impor
The emopen t
• the
• thethe
Illumi
The butrunk.
The butrunk.
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
42Antitheft alarm system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
alarm is automatically armed or disarmed ote control by locking or unlocking the
alarm is armed within approx. 10 seconds the vehicle.
mp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed.
rm system has been armed, the exterior s will flash and an alarm will sound when
oor,
e trunk,
e hood,
to raise the vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS
Antitheft alarm system
1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console
The antitheftwith the remvehicle.
The antitheftafter locking
A blinking la
Operation:
Once the alavehicle lampsomeone:
• opens a d
• opens th
• opens th
• attempts
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS An
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will
Notes:
ommend that you carry the electronic reserve us mechanical key with you and keep it in a safe e.g. your wallet) so that it is always handy. Never he electronic reserve key in the vehicle.
you unlock the driver’s door with the mechanical e exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will .
rrupt the alarm, insert the electronic key in the g lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the nic main key.
WWW.MANUA43titheft alarm system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed. The antitheft alarm system is switched off automatically if the vehicle is unlocked with the electronic main key. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid on page 180.
We reckey plplace (leave t
When key, thsound
To intesteerinelectro
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
44Tow-away alarm
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ill last approximately 3 minutes in form of rior lamps. At the same time an alarm will seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the mediately lowered. The tow-away alarm itched off automatically if the vehicle is h the electronic main key.
tays on for more than 20 seconds, an all is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid
iggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch ay alarm before towing the vehicle, or
g on a surface subject to movement, such auto train.
electronic key in steering lock to 0, or remove electronic key from steering w-away alarm switch (1). The indicator inates briefly.
and lock vehicle with the remote control.
alarm remains switched off until the ked again with mechanical key or remote hich time it is automatically reactivated.
WWW.MANUALS
Tow-away alarm
The switch is located in the center console.
1 Press to switch off
2 Indicator lamp
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
The alarm wflashing extesound for 30vehicle is imsystem is swunlocked wit
If the alarm semergency con page 180.
To prevent troff the tow-awwhen parkinas a ferry or
To do so, turnposition 1 orlock. Press tolamp (2) illum
Exit vehicle,
The tow-awayvehicle is loccontrol, at w
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Se
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Power seats, front
rate the front power seat adjustment switches, lectronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2 he driver’s or passenger’s door open, the power an also be operated with the electronic key ed or in steering lock position 0).
ing!
leaving the vehicle always remove the onic key from the steering lock, and lock your le.
ower seats can also be operated with the r’s or passenger door open. Do not leave en unattended in the vehicle or with access
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle ment may cause serious personal injury.
WWW.MANUA45ats
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
To opeturn e(with tseats cremov
Warning!
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body.
Never place hands under seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Warn
Whenelectrvehic
The pdrivechildrto an equip
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
46Seats
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
e position should be as far rearward as consistent with ability to properly operate
ove the front passenger seat completely f objects are stored in the parcel net in the senger side footwell. Items in the net may ed.
hion tilt switch in the direction of the arrow until are lightly supported.
tilt switch in the direction of the arrow until s are slightly angled when holding the wheel.
traint eat adjustment, the head restraint is cally adjusted based on seat (fore/aft) to support the back of the head ately at ear level. Please check the position
ad restraint to assure that it supports the he head approximately at ear level. The raint angle can also be adjusted manually.
WWW.MANUALS
The slide switches are located in each door.
We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following order:
1 Seat, up/down Press the switch (up/down direction) until comfortable seating position with still sufficient headroom is reached.
2 Seat, fore/aft Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a comfortable seating position is reached that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal
safely. Thpossible,controls.
Note:
Do not mforward ifront pasbe damag
3 Seat cusPress theyour legs
4 BackrestPress theyour armsteering
5 Head resDuring sautomatiposition approximof the heback of thead rest
8
7
4
5
2 2
1 3
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Se
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Notes: Caution!
remove head restraints except when mounting vers. For removal see page 51. Whenever nts have been removed be sure to reinstall them driving.
WWW.MANUA47ats
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Your vehicle is equipped with power head restraints, do not try to raise or lower them manually.
Only minor personal adjustments, as described below, should then be required.For steering wheel adjustment, see page 78;inside rear view mirror, see page 79;exterior rear view mirrors, see page 80.
Do notseat corestraibefore
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
48Seats
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
seat/head restraint and exterior rear view ons may be programmed into memory. t/head restraint and exterior rear view ositioned, push memory button (6), within 3 seconds push position button “1”. third set of positions for the same seat/t and exterior rear view mirrors can be into memory by pushing first memory d then “2”, respectively “3”.
for instructions on adjustment of mirrors.
WWW.MANUALS
Memory storing and recalling
6 Memory button
7 Position buttons
Storing
Three sets ofmirror positiAfter the seamirrors are prelease, and A second andhead restrainprogrammedbutton (6) an
Note:
See page 80
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Se
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Recalling Synchronizing power seats and head restraints
ower supply was interrupted (battery nected or empty), the power seats and head nts are no longer adjusted automatically.
nchronize the adjustment feature, turn nic key in steering lock to position 2, move the mpletely forward and the head restraint fully and hold respective buttons for approx. nds.
WWW.MANUA49ats
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
To recall a seat/head restraint and exterior rear view mirror position, push and hold position button “1”, “2” or “3” until seat/head restraint and exterior rear view mirror movement has stopped. The seat/head restraint and exterior rear view mirror movement stops when the position button is released.
Caution!
Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move the backrest to an upright position.
If the pdisconrestrai
To resyelectroseat codown, 2 seco
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
50Seats
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
years old and under must never ride in at, except in a Mercedes-Benz BabySmartTM compatible child seat, ates with the BabySmartTM system the vehicle to deactivate the passenger irbag when it is properly installed. hey will be struck by the airbag when it crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
result.
o accident statistics, children are safer rly restrained in the rear seating an in the front seating positions. small children must ride in back seats ed in an appropriate infant or child stem, which is properly secured with s seat belt, fully in accordance with the anufacturer’s instructions.
k of serious or fatal injuries is y increased if the child restraints are y secured in the vehicle and the child is y secured in the child restraint.
WWW.MANUALS
Important!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should adjust the seat height for proper vision as well as fore/aft placement and backrest angle to insure adequate control, reach, operation, and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag section on page 67 for proper seat positioning.
In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation, and comfort.
Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rearward vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.
Warning!
Children 12the front seauthorized which operinstalled inside front aOtherwise tinflates in ainjury will
According twhen propepositions thInfants andand be seatrestraint sythe vehicle’child seat m
A child’s rissignificantlnot properlnot properl
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Se
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Front head restraints
ation:
utton (1) of the power adjustable head restraint approximately 5 seconds.
the head restraint and push it down to the stop.
head restraint to the desired position.
sitioning of head restraints see also power seats, n page 45, and head restraints, rear on page 52.
WWW.MANUA51ats
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Removal:
Tilt the backrest rearward for easier removal of the front head restraints.
Push button (1) up to bring the power adjustable head restraint to its highest position.
Pull out head restraint completely with both hands.
Install
Push bup for
Insert
Adjust
For pofront o
Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
52Seats
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
restraints backward (with engine
l-side of rocker switch to release the head e head restraints will then fold backward visibility.
restraints upright: traint forward until it locks in position.
d restraints: traint angle can be adjusted manually.
WWW.MANUALS
Head restraints, rear Folding headrunning):
Press symborestraints. Thfor increased
Placing headPull head res
Angle of heaThe head res
P54.25-2035-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Se
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Important!
fety reasons, always drive with the rear head nts in the upright position when the rear seats upied.
rea around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. g) to not obstruct the folding operation of the
estraints.
WWW.MANUA53ats
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
For sarestraiare occ
Keep aclothinhead r
P91.10-2055-20
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
54Seats
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ic seat slide is provided with a safety automatic process is interrupted, if the e sliding seat is pushed against an bject. The seat will slide forward, stop, and pts sliding backward.
utomatic process, activate the power seat
nd correct the cause of interruption.
ory button or power seat switch to bring ired position.
ng the vehicle always remove the ey from the steering lock, and lock your
eats can also be operated with the assenger door open. Do not leave attended in the vehicle or with access ed vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
may cause serious personal injury.
hands under seat or near any moving g a seat adjustment procedure.
WWW.MANUALS
Backrest
1 Release lever
Folding forward: Lift release lever (1) and fold backrest forward. The seat will automatically slide forward and the head restraint will move down.
Folding back: Lift release lever (1) and fold backrest back. The seat and head restraint return to their previous positions.
To interrupt the procedure, activate the power seat switch.
Notes:
The automatfeature. The backrest of thoccupant or omake 3 attem
To halt the aswitch.
Investigate a
Now use memseat into des
Warning!
When leavielectronic kvehicle.
The power sdriver’s or pchildren unto an unlockequipment
Never placeparts durin
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Se
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Multicontour seat (optional CLK 430, Standard CL 55 AMG))
We recommend to adjust the multicontour seat in the following order:
at cushion depth de the switch fore or aft until your legs are pported comfortably.
ckrest bottom
ckrest center
e bolster adjustment just the side bolster to provide good lateral pport.
at cushion movement and amount of backrest n height and curvature can be continuously with regulators (1, 2 and 3) after turning the nic key in steering lock to position 2.
de bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with switch (4):
ss to the right – increase side support,
ss to the left – decrease side support.
ngine is turned off, the last cushion setting is d in memory, and automatically adjusts the n to this setting when the engine is restarted.
WWW.MANUA55ats
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
This vehicle may be equipped with multicontour seats. These seats have movable seat cushions, and inflatable air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
1 SeSlisu
2 Ba
3 Ba
4 SidAdsu
The secushiovariedelectro
The sirocker
• pre
• pre
If the eretainecushio
1 23
4
P91.25-2063-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
56Seats
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
to turn on seat heater:
eat heating mode. One indicator lamp in h lights up.
t heating mode. Both indicator lamps in h light up.
roximately 5 minutes in the rapid seat ode, the seat heater automatically
to normal operation and only one indicator l stay on.
eat heater:
tor lamp is on, press upper half of switch.
tor lamps are on, press lower half of
seat heater automatically turns off after ly 30 minutes of operation.
WWW.MANUALS
Heated seats (front)
The front seat heater switches are located in the center console.
The front seat heaters can be switched on with the electronic key in steering lock positions 1 or 2.
Press switch
1 Normal sthe switc
2 Rapid seathe switc
After appheating mswitcheslamp wil
Turning off s
If one indica
If both indicaswitch.
If left on, theapproximate
P54.25-2036-26
1
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Se
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Notes:
WWW.MANUA57ats
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the seat heater longer than necessary.
The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too many power consumers are switched on at the same time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs, the indicator lamp in the switch will blink (both indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode). The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to you, the seat heaters can be switched off.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
58Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
years old and under must never ride in at, except in a Mercedes-Benz BabySmartTM compatible child seat, ates with the BabySmartTM system the vehicle to deactivate the passenger when it is properly installed. hey will be struck by the airbag when it crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
result.
o accident statistics, children are safer rly restrained in the rear seating an in the front seating positions. small children must ride in back seats ed in an appropriate infant or child stem, which is properly secured with s seat belt, fully in accordance with the anufacturer’s instructions.
k of serious or fatal injuries is y increased if the child restraints are y secured in the vehicle and the child is y secured in the child restraint.
WWW.MANUALS
Seat belts and integrated restraint system
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats, emergency tensioning retractors for the front seat belts, dual front airbags, door mounted side impact airbags and knee bolsters for driver and front passenger. Their protective functions are designed to complement one another.
Seat belts
Important!
Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require seat belt use.
All states and provinces require use of child restraints that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly recommend their use.
Warning!
Children 12the front seauthorized which operinstalled infront airbagOtherwise tinflates in ainjury will
According twhen propepositions thInfants andand be seatrestraint sythe vehicle’child seat m
A child’s rissignificantlnot properlnot properl
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Warning! Warning!
e to wear and properly fasten and position seat belt greatly increases your risk of es and their likely severity in an accident. nd your passengers should always wear seat
are ever in an accident, your injuries can be derably more severe without your seat belt rly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, re much more likely to hit the interior of the le or be ejected from it. You can be seriously d or killed.
same crash, the possibility for injury or is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt.
ing!
let more people ride in the vehicle than there at belts available. Be sure everyone riding in hicle is correctly restrained with a separate elt.
WWW.MANUA59straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Note:
For cleaning and care of the seat belts, see page 296.
Seat belt nonusage warning system
With the electronic key in steering lock position 2, a warning sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. See also seat belt warning lamp on page 232.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body.
Failuryour injuriYou abelts.
If youconsipropeyou avehicinjure
In thedeath
Warn
Neverare sethe veseat b
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
60Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not . A twisted seat belt may cause injury.
severe or fatal injuries, the lap belt must as low as possible on your hips and not domen.
en your seat belt before driving off. e sure your passengers are properly even those sitting in the rear.
WWW.MANUALS
Fastening of seat belts
1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
Push latch pltwist the belt
To help avoidbe positionedacross the ab
1
23
Warning!
Always fastAlways makrestrained –
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
tton for belt height adjustment
e, slide belt height adjustment upward.
er, press button (4) and slide belt height ment downward.
n!
fety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or backrest sitions which could affect the correct seat belt n.
4
WWW.MANUA61straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled snug and checked for snugness immediately after engaging it.
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it should not touch the neck). For this purpose, you can adjust the belt height. Five positions are available.
4 Bu
To rais
To lowadjust
Cautio
For sainto popositio
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
62Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ELTS PROPERLY.
lts can only work when used properly. ear seat belts in any other way than as ed in this section, as that could result us injuries in case of an accident.
cupant should wear their seat belt at all ecause seat belts help reduce the od of and potential severity of injuries ents, including rollovers. The
ted restraint system includes “SRS” airbag, front passenger airbag, door d side impact airbags), “ETR” (seat belt ncy tensioning retractors), and front ee bolsters. The system is designed to e the protection offered to properly ccupants in certain frontal (front ) and side (side impact airbags) impacts xceed preset deployment thresholds.
ear belts over rigid or breakable in or on your clothing, such as ses, pens, keys etc., as these might njuries.
WWW.MANUALS
Unfastening of seat belts
Push the release button (3) in the belt buckle (2). Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate (1).
Operation
The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during sudden vehicle stops or when quickly pulling on the belt. The locking function of the reel may be checked by quickly pulling out the belt.
1
23
Warning!
USE SEAT B
• Seat beNever wdescribin serio
• Each octimes, blikelihoin accidintegra(drivermounteemergeseat knenhancbelted oairbagswhich e
• Never wobjectseyeglascause i
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a
• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to
anage impact forces. The twisted belt against our body could cause injuries.
regnant women should also use a lap-houlder belt. The lap belt portion should be ositioned as low as possible on the hips to void any possible pressure on the abdomen.
ever place your feet on the instrument panel r on the seat. Always keep both feet on the oor in front of the seat.
WWW.MANUA63straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.
• Each seat belt should never be used for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects.
my
• Pspa
• Nofl
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
64Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
k of serious or fatal injuries is y increased if the child restraints are y secured in the vehicle and the child is y secured in the child restraint.
o big for child restraint systems must seats using regular seat belts. Position lt across chest and shoulder, not face or ster seat may be necessary to achieve positioning.
WWW.MANUALS
Warning!
USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
A child’s rissignificantlnot properlnot properl
Children toride in backshoulder beneck. A booproper belt
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation systemTM
st BabySmartTM ut special child seat installed
urning electronic key in steering lock to n 1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp located on the console comes on for approx. 6 seconds and then uishes.
ndicator lamp should not come on or is uously lit, the system is not functioning. You must authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating ild on the front passenger seat.
artTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats.
assenger front airbag will not deploy only if indicator lamp remains illuminated.
e be sure to check the indicator every time se the special system child seat.
d the light go out while the restraint is led, please check installation. If the light ins out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint nsport children on the front passenger seat the system has been repaired.
WWW.MANUA65straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Special BabySmart compatible child seats, designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front airbag will not deploy. The 7 indicator lamp located on the center console will be illuminated, except with electronic key removed or in steering lock position 0. The system does not deactivate the door mounted side impact airbag.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.Self-tewitho
After tpositiocenterexting
If the icontinsee anany ch
BabySm
Warning!
The BabySmartTM Airbag Deactivation System will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system.
The pthe 7
Pleasyou u
Shoulinstalremato trauntil
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
66Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
tensioning retractor (ETR)
s for the front seats are equipped with nsioning retractors. These tensioning located in each belt’s inertia reel and
ationally ready with the electronic key in position 1 or 2.
cy tensioning retractors are designed to when the seat belts are fastened during ts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS
mpacts exceeding a preset severity level. slack from the belts in such a way that the more snugly against the body restricting its ement as much as possible.
her frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll- side impacts, or other accidents without ntal or rear impact forces, the emergency tractors will not be activated. The driver
ers will then be protected by the fastened d inertia reel in the usual manner.
and emergency tensioning retractor safety e page 73.
WWW.MANUALS
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were designed to operate, and do not afford any protection whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not designed to deploy.
The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to activate either the emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the direction and severity of the impact exceeding the preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened.
Seat belt fastened
• first threshold exceeded: ETR activates
• second threshold exceeded: airbag also activates
Seat belt not fastened
• first threshold exceeded: airbag activates, but not ETR
Driver and front passenger systems operate independently of each other.
Emergency
The seat beltemergency teretractors arebecome opersteering lock
The emergenactivate onlyfrontal impacand in rear iThey removeseat belts fit forward mov
In cases of otovers, certainsufficient frotensioning reand passengseat belts an
For seat belt guidelines se
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Airbags
nt passenger airbag
ssenger front airbag is located in the dash board of the front passenger.
SRSAIRBAGSRSAIRBAG
2
WWW.MANUA67straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Driver airbag
The driver airbag is located in the steering wheel hub.
2 Fro
The paahead
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
68Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
impact airbags can provide increased belted front passengers on the impacted hicle in side impacts exceeding its preset
nal readiness of the airbag system is e indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument turning the electronic key in steering lock or 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go roximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes m continues to monitor the components of the airbag system and will indicate a by coming on again. If the lamp does not ll or if it fails to extinguish after ly 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter, n in the system has been detected.
system components are monitored or lf-check: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition t seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning at sensor.
WWW.MANUALS
3 Side impact airbag
The side impact airbags are located in the doors.
The most effective occupant restraint system yet developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt. In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat belt can be further enhanced by an airbag.
In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver and front passenger airbags can provide increased protection for the driver and front passenger in certain frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds. Door
mounted sideprotection toside of the vethreshold.
Important!
The operatioverified by thcluster whento position 1 out after appout, the systeand circuitrymalfunction come on at aapproximatea malfunctio
The followingundergo a secircuits, fronretractors, se
3
P91.60-2122-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Initially, when the electronic key is turned from steering lock position 0 to positions 1 or 2, malfunctions in the
Front airbags
iver and front passenger front airbags are ed to activate only in certain frontal impacts ing a preset threshold.
nt passenger airbag deploys only if the front ger seat is occupied and the indicator lamp on ter console is not illuminated.
objects on the front passenger seat can appear to RS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in at which causes the passenger front airbag to in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold.
WWW.MANUA69straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
crash-sensor are detected and indicated (the “SRS” indicator lamp stays on longer than 4 seconds or does not come on).
Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp has gone out following the initial check, interruptions or short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses, and low voltage in the entire system are detected and indicated.
The drdesignexceed
The fropassenthe cen
Note:
Heavythe “Sthat sedeploy
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
70Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
designed to activate only in certain t airbags) impacts, or side (side impact acts which exceed preset thresholds.
these types of impacts, if of sufficient eet the deployment thresholds, will their supplemental protection.
nd passenger should always wear their therwise it is not possible for the airbags eir intended supplemental protection.
ther frontal impacts, angled impacts, ther side impacts, rear collisions, or nts in which the airbags are not deploy, the airbags will not be activated. nd passenger will then be protected by seat belts.
you not to rely on the presence of the rder to avoid wearing your seat belt.
WWW.MANUALS
Side impact airbags
The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only the side impact airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys.
The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys only if the front passenger seat is occupied.
Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a properly positioned and fastened seat belt.
Note:
Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the side impact airbag to deploy in a crash.
Important!
Airbags arefrontal (fronairbags) imp
Only duringseverity to mthey provide
The driver aseat belts, oto provide th
In cases of oroll-overs, oother accidedesigned to The driver athe fastened
We caution airbags in o
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags which are designed to activate in certain impacts
ing a preset threshold to reduce the potential verity of injury. It is important to your safety at of your passenger that you replace deployed s and repair any malfunctioning airbags to
e the vehicle will continue to provide crash tion for occupants.
Warning!
ing!
uce the risk of injury when the front airbags e, it is very important for the driver and front nger to always be in a properly seated on and to wear their seat belts.
aximum protection in the event of a collision s be in normal seated position with your back st the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and e that it is properly positioned on your body.
the airbag inflates with considerable speed rce, a proper seating and hands on steering
l position will help to keep you at a safe ce from the airbag. Occupants who are ted, out of position or too close to the airbag e seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates great force in the blink of an eye:
WWW.MANUA71straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
exceedand seand thairbagensurprotec
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, and side (side impact airbags) impacts which may cause significant injuries, however, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.
Warn
To redinflatpassepositi
For malwayagainensur
Sinceand fowheedistanunbelcan bwith
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
72Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
the front passenger seat as far as e rearward from the dashboard when t is occupied.
nts, especially children, should never eir heads in the area of the door where airbag inflates. This could result in injuries or death should the airbag be d. Always sit upright, properly use the ts, and appropriate size infant or child t system.
n 12 years old and under must never the front seat, except in a Mercedes-thorized BabySmartTM compatible child
hich operates with the BabySmartTM installed in the vehicle to deactivate the ger front airbag when it is properly d. Otherwise they will be struck by the when it inflates in a crash. If this s, serious or fatal injury can result.
llow these instructions can result in tal injuries to you or other occupants.
WWW.MANUALS
• Sit properly belted in an upright position with your back against the backrest.
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when the driver front airbag inflates.
• Adjust possiblthe sea
• Occupalean ththe sideserioustriggereseat belrestrain
• Childreride in Benz auseat, wsystem passeninstalleairbag happen
Failure to fosevere or fa
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag
Warning!
ing!
amaged seat belts or belts that were highly ressed in an accident must be replaced and eir anchoring points must also be checked. se only belts installed or supplied by an uthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
o not pass belts over sharp edges.
o not make any modification that could hange the effectiveness of the belts.
irbags and ETR’s are designed to function on one-time-only basis. An airbag or emergency nsioning retractor (ETR) that was activated ust be replaced.
WWW.MANUA73straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn off the passenger side front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off the passenger’s side impact airbag.
It should be noted however that there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly.
Warn
• DstthUa
• D
• Dc
• Aatem
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
74Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ll the vehicle we strongly urge you to give subsequent owner that it is equipped with lerting him to the applicable section in the anual.
r protection and the protection of when scrapping the airbag unit or ncy tensioning retractor, our safety tions must be followed. These tions are available at your authorized es-Benz Center.
he considerable deployment speed and ile structure of the airbags, there is the lity of abrasions or other injuries g from airbag deployment.
WWW.MANUALS
When you senotice to thean “SRS” by aOperator’s M
• No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the “SRS”, the installation of additional trim material, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, front passenger airbag cover, or front door trim panels, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near “SRS” components and wiring. Keep area between airbags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
• An airbag system component within the steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has inflated. Do not touch.
• Improper work on the system, including incorrect installation and removal, can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the “SRS”.
• In addition, through improper work there is the risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative. Work on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• For youothers,emergeinstrucinstrucMerced
• Given tthe textpossibiresultin
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Infant and child restraint systems Important!
e of infant or child restraints is required by law in states and all Canadian provinces.
and small children should be seated in an riate infant or child restraint system properly d by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with deral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and ian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ment by the child restraint manufacturer of ance with this standard can be found on the tion label on the restraint and in the instruction l provided with the restraint.
using any infant or child restraint system, be sure fully read and follow all manufacturer’s tions for installation and use.
read and observe warning labels affixed to inside icle and to infant or child restraints.
WWW.MANUA75straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
We recommend all infants and children be properly re-strained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints.
To activate, pull shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner.
Note:
For child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages refer to page 77 (installation of infant and child restraint systems).
The usall 50
InfantsappropsecureU.S. FeCanadA statecompliinstrucmanua
When to careinstruc
Pleaseof veh
Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
76Restraint systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
small children should never share a th another occupant. During an ey could be crushed between the d seat belt.
o big for child restraint systems must seats using regular seat belts. Position lt across chest and shoulder, not face or ster seat may be necessary to achieve positioning for children from 41 lbs. to here a lap/shoulder belt fits properly .
hild restraint is not in use, remove it hicle or secure it with the seat belt to child restraint from becoming a the event of an accident.
WWW.MANUALS
Warning!
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Infants andseat belt wiaccident, thoccupant an
Children toride in backshoulder beneck. A booproper beltthe point wwithout one
When the cfrom the veprevent theprojectile in
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Installation of infant and child restraint systems
ure a tether strap to the anchorage, securely the hook (3), which is part of the tether strap, to chorage ring (2). For safety, please make sure that ok has attached to the ring beyond the safety as illustrated.
emoving the tether strap, reinstall the cover (1).
WWW.MANUA77straint systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
This vehicle is provided with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions.
Prior to installing a tether strap, remove cover (1) from anchorage ring (2) and store in a convenient place (e.g. glove box).
To secfasten the anthe hocatch,
After r
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
78Adjusting telescoping steering column
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
1) out to its stop. The indicator lamp, e instrument cluster, comes on.
r shorten the steering column, pull out or ing wheel.
(1) in until it engages. The indicator lamp, e instrument cluster, goes out.
tronic key in steering lock position 2, the p in the instrument cluster comes on.
out when the engine is running.
or lamp does not go out after starting the djustable steering column is not locked
the vehicle until you have properly locked column.
WWW.MANUALS
Adjusting telescoping steering column Unlocking: Pull handle (located in th
Adjusting: To lengthen opush in steer
Locking: Push handlelocated in th
Important!
With the elecindicator lamIt should go
If the indicatengine, the aproperly.
Do not drive the steering
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
1
P46.10-2020-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Inside rear view mirror Note:
tomatic antiglare function does not react, if ing light is not aimed directly at sensors in the .
ing!
case of an accident liquid electrolyte may e the mirror housing when the mirror glass s.
olyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, piratory system. In cases it does, immediately affected area with water, and seek medical f necessary.
WWW.MANUA79ar view mirrors
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Manually adjust the mirror.
Use your inside mirror to determine the size and distance of objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Antiglare night position
With the electronic key in steering lock position 2, the mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in light sensitivity.
With gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the interior lamp switched on, the mirror brightness does not respond to changes in light sensitivity.
The auincommirror
Warn
In theescapbreak
Electrliquidor resflushhelp i
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
80Rear view mirrors
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
tronic key in steering lock position 2, the mirror reflection brightness responds to ght sensitivity.
lector lever in position “R”, or with the switched on, the driver’s side mirror oes not respond to changes in light
mirrors have electrically heated glass. The es on automatically, depending on outside
mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its ion, it must be repositioned by applying e until it snaps into place.
re when using the passenger-side passenger-side exterior mirror is wardly curved surface for a wider field jects in mirror are closer than they ck your inside rear view mirror or your shoulder before changing lanes.
WWW.MANUALS
Exterior rear view mirrors
The switch is located on the center console.
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
First select the mirror to be adjusted – press button:
% Left mirror
& Right mirror
To adjust, toggle the switch forward, backward or to either side.
With the elecdriver’s side changes in li
With gear seinterior lampbrightness dsensitivity.
Notes:
The exterior heater switchtemperature.
If an exteriornormal positfirm pressur
Warning!
Exercise camirror. Theconvex (outof view). Obappear. Cheglance over
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Storing mirror positions in memory
terior rear view mirror positions are stored in ry with the seat/head restraint position and can alled when necessary, see page 48.
Warning!
WWW.MANUA81ar view mirrors
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Important!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state, by applying plenty of water.
The exmemobe rec
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
82Rear view mirrors
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
osition can now be adjusted as desired.
ove approx. 6 mph (10 km/h), upon shifting lever from “R” Reverse, or upon pressing ide mirror button, the passenger-side
eturn to its previous position.
mirror as desired.
WWW.MANUALS
Parking position
The passenger-side exterior mirror can be adjusted and programmed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers (e.g. to observe the curb or other objects close to the vehicle).
With electronic key in steering lock position 2, and the exterior rear view mirror switch in the passenger side position, the passenger-side mirror will be turned downward when placing the gear selector lever in “R” Reverse.
The mirror p
At speeds abgear selectorthe driver’s smirror will r
Readjust the
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Re
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
One passenger-side mirror position can be stored in memory. To do so:
3. Press green memory button located in switch cluster for driver’s seat, see page 48.
thin 3 seconds pull the mirror toggle switch rward. The mirror should not move.
peat the memory procedure if the mirror moves.
lect driver side mirror. The passenger-side mirror ll return to its previous position.
WWW.MANUA83ar view mirrors
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1. Turn electronic key to steering lock position 2.
The vehicle must be stationary.
2. Select passenger-side mirror and adjust the mirror to view the curb.
4. Wirea
Re
5. Sewi
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
84Instrument cluster
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
WWW.MANUALS
Instrument cluster
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ins
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
1 Push buttons V and W for intensity of instrument lamps, see page 87
8 Speedometer
p odometer, see page 89
in odometer
ltifunction indicator, see page 233FSS indicator, see page 111engine oil level indicator, see page 114
ht turn signal indicator lamp, see combination itch on page 119
chometer, see page 89
ar range indicator display, see selector lever sitions, see page 196
ck, see page 108
WWW.MANUA85trument cluster
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
2 Push button J for resetting trip odometer, see page 89, or to acknowledge a malfunction or warning message, see page 106
3 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 88
4 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement warning lamp, see page 230
5 Outside temperature indicator, see page 88
6 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see combination switch on page 119
7 ESP warning lamp, see page 231
9 Tri
10 Ma
11 Muor or
12 Rigsw
13 Ta
14 Gepo
15 Clo
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
86Instrument cluster
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
elescoping steering column not locked, ee page 232
RS malfunction, see page 230
ngine malfunction indicator lamp. If the CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator mp comes on when the engine is running, indicates a malfunction of the fuel anagement system, emission control
ystem, systems which impact emissions, or e fuel cap is not closed tight. In all cases, e recommend that you have the alfunction checked as soon as possible, see
age 230
dicator lamp on the center console
ront passenger airbag automatically itched off, see page 232
WWW.MANUALS
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
High beam
ABS malfunction, see page 231
Brake fluid low (except Canada), Parking brake engaged, see page 237
Brake fluid low (Canada only), Parking brake engaged, see page 237
BAS malfunction, see page 231ESP malfunction, see page 231
ESP. Adjust driving to road condition, see page 231
Fasten seat belts, see page 232
Ts
S
E“laitmsthwmp
Function in
Fsw
ABS
BRAKE
BASESP
SRS
CHECKENGINE
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ins
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Activating instrument cluster Instrument lamps
te the instrument cluster.
V or W button to vary intensity of instrument
P54.30-2767-26
WWW.MANUA87trument cluster
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The instrument cluster is activated by:
• Opening the door.
• Pressing button J, V or W on the instrument cluster.
• Turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
• Switching on the exterior lamps.
Display illumination
The display for temperature, odometer, multifunction indicator, FSS indicator and clock is illuminated briefly when opening the driver’s door.
The display illumination brightness responds automatically according to changes in the surrounding light sensitivity.
To briefly illuminate the display (with electronic key removed or in steering lock position 0), press button J.
Activa
Presslamps.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
88Instrument cluster
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
perature indicator (5)
ture sensor is located in the front bumper its location, the sensor can be affected by e heat during idling or slow driving. This
he accuracy of the displayed temperature erified by comparison to a thermometer o the sensor, not by comparison to external bank signs etc.).
ambient temperature takes place in steps on the prevailing driving conditions (stop-derate, constant driving) and amount of change.
temperature indicator is not designed n Ice-Warning Device and is therefore
for that purpose. Indicated es just above the freezing point do not hat the road surface is free of ice.
WWW.MANUALS
Coolant temperature gauge (3)
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red marking.
The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Outside tem
The temperaarea. Due to road or enginmeans that tcan only be vplaced next tdisplays (e.g.
Adaptation toand dependsand-go or motemperature
Warning!
• Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.
Warning!
The outsideto serve as aunsuitable temperaturguarantee t
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ins
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Trip odometer (9) Tachometer (13)
d marking on tachometer denotes excessive speed.
this engine speed, as it may result in serious damage that is not covered by the des-Benz Limited Warranty.
protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted ngine is operated within the red marking.
WWW.MANUA89trument cluster
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
To reset to “0” miles/km:
Activate the instrument cluster if it is not already activated by pressing the J button on the instrument cluster.
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears if it is not displayed. See page 94.
Press button J on the instrument cluster to reset trip odometer.
The reengine
Avoid engineMerce
To helpif the e
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
90Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
WWW.MANUALS
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, you may use the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to call
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed.
ng the è button advances the display to the ystem.
ng the ÿ button returns the display to the us system.
ay call up additional displays within some of these ries by pressing the j or k button.
ing!
er’s attention to the road must always be his/rimary focus when driving.
ur safety and the safety of others, selecting es through the multifunction steering wheel d only be done by the driver when traffic and onditions permit it to be done safely.
amming individual settings in the system can e made while the vehicle is at standstill.
WWW.MANUA91ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
up, control and set the following systems in the multifunction display:
1 Trip odometer and main odometer, see page 94
Vehicle speed, see page 94Flexible service system (FSS), see page 111Engine oil level indicator, see page 114
2 Audio systems, see page 95
Radio, see page 95CD player (optional), see page 96Cassette player, see page 97
3 Navigation system (optional), see page 103
4 Malfunction message memory, see page 106
5 Individual settings, see page 108
6 Trip computer, see page 104
After startAfter resetFuel tank content
7 Telephone (if so equipped), see page 98
Pressinext s
Pressiprevio
You mcatego
Warn
A drivher p
For yofeaturshoulroad cProgronly b
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
92Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
tronic key in steering look to position 1
:
next system
previous system
next display in system
previous display in system
ncrease the volume
ecrease the volume
ial a telephone number, see page 100
102 for instructions on answering an call.
nd a call
WWW.MANUALS
1 Multifunction steering wheel
2 Multifunction display
Turn the elecor 2.
Press button
3 è for
4 ÿ for
5 j for
6 k for
7 æ to i
8 ç to d
9 í to d
See pageincoming
10 ì to e
100
40
60
80
60
40
mph
20km/h20
100
120
140
160
80
100
VDO
180
200
220
240
160120 140
9 9
TEL
OFFRESUME
1
2
3
4
5 6 78
10
1
3
4
5 6 8 7
910
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the required system is displayed.
Note:
splays in the multifunction display can be set to n, English, French, Italian or Spanish language. e “TEXT” individual setting on page 108 for tions on changing the language setting.
splays for the audio systems (radio, CD player, te player) will appear in English, regardless of the ge selected.
WWW.MANUA93ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Pressing the è button advances the display to the next system.
Pressing the ÿ returns the display to the previous system.
You may call up additional displays in some systems by pressing the j or k button.
The diGermaSee thinstruc
The dicassetlangua
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
94Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
eter and main odometer 89 for instructions on resetting the trip .
peed
ible service system), see page 111.
il level indicator, see page 114.
r ÿ button repeatedly until the trip d main odometer display (1) appears.
or k button repeatedly until the lay (2, 3, 4, 1) appears.
è or ÿ button displays the next or tem.
WWW.MANUALS
Trip and main odometer, vehicle speed, FSS andengine oil level indicator
1 Trip odomSee pageodometer
2 Vehicle s
3 FSS (Flex
4 Engine o
Press è oodometer an
Press the jrequired disp
Pressing theprevious sys
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Audio systems 1 Audio system is switched off.
e radio is switched on.
ve band setting and memory location number, ere appropriate.
tion frequency.
is only appears when “MEMORY” rather than EQUENCY” has been selected in the individual
tings. See page 108.
dio must be switched on.
the è or ÿ button repeatedly until (2) appears.
utton j or k repeatedly until the required or frequency is displayed.
e j of k button to select a stored station or frequency. This depends on the selection made “STATION SEARCH USING” setting menu. ge 108.
ng the è or ÿ button displays the next or us system.
WWW.MANUA95ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Radio 2 Th
3 Wawh
4 Sta
5 Th“FRset
The ra
Press display
Press bstation
Use thstationin the See pa
PressiprevioP54.30-2936-27
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
96Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
stem is switched off.
layer is switched on.
ber of the CD currently playing is displayed using a CD changer.
mber.
st be switched on.
r must be switched on.
or ÿ button repeatedly until pears.
or k button repeatedly until the k number (4) is displayed.
è or ÿ button displays the next or tem.
D from the magazine, press a number on the (optional) COMAND system located in shboard.
WWW.MANUALS
CD player (optional) 1 Audio sy
2 The CD p
3 The numif you are
4 Track nu
The radio mu
The CD playe
Press the èdisplay (2) ap
Press the jrequired trac
Pressing theprevious sys
Note:
To select a Cthe audio or the center da
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Cassette player 1 Audio system is switched off.
e cassette player is switched on.
e being played.
dio must be switched on.
ssette player must be switched on.
the è or ÿ button repeatedly until (2) appears.
ng the j button fast forwards on to the next
ng the k button rewinds the cassette to the ing of the current track.
ng the è or ÿ button displays the next or us system.
ct the reverse side of the tape, press button below umber on the audio system display, or enter t on the (optional) COMAND system located in ter dashboard.
WWW.MANUA97ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
2 Th
3 Sid
The ra
The ca
Press display
Pressitrack.
Pressibeginn
Pressiprevio
Note:
To seletrack nrequesthe cen
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
98Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
hone is switched off.
cle is currently outside the transmitter or range.
hone is ready for use.
ected from the telephone book.
for the name selected. Dialing commences.
completed. The name is displayed. The emains for the duration of the call.
of call.
location number.
WWW.MANUALS
Telephone
Telephone book
1 The telep
2 The vehireceiver
3 The telep
4 Name sel
5 Number
6 Dialing isdisplay r
7 Duration
8 Memory 8
P54.30-3578-27
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
The telephone must be switched on. Press the í button when the name you require appears in the display (4). The telephone number (5) is
.
me will be displayed when dialing is completed. y (6) remains for the duration of the call.
ng the ì button hangs up and display (3) s.
ng the è or ÿ button displays the next or us system.
WWW.MANUA99ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until display (3) appears. See the separate telephone instructions manual.
Pressing j or k “browses” alphabetically forwards or backwards through the telephone book, providing it was previously downloaded. See telephone operator’s manual for details concerning downloading. Pressing button j or k for longer than a second “browses” rapidly through the telephone book.The name selected appears in the display.
Note:
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (3) appears.
dialed
The naDispla
Pressiappear
Pressiprevio
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
100Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
hone is ready for use.
or name stored in the redial memory.
in the redial memory – redialing has ed.
completed and the name stored in the e book is displayed or the number dialed in displayed if no name has been stored.
lay remains for the duration of the call.
of call.
location numbers — the 10 most recently mbers are stored.recently dialed number, previously dialed numbers.
WWW.MANUALS
Redialing 1 The telep
2 Number
3 Number commenc
4 Dialing istelephonwill remaThe disp
5 Duration
6 Memory dialed nuL0, most L1 to L9,
P54.30-3580-27
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
The telephone must be switched on. Press the í button when the required number or name appears in the display (2).
lephone number (3) is dialed.
ialing is completed the name (4) is displayed if me is stored in the telephone book; failing that mber dialed will remain displayed. The display s for the duration of the call.
ng the ì button hangs up and display (1) s.
ng the è or ÿ button displays the next or us system.
WWW.MANUA101ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the display (1) appears.
Pressing the í button activates the redial memory and the most recently dialed number is displayed.
Pressing the j or k button “browses” forwards or backwards through the redial memory. The number selected appears in the display.
Note:
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (1) appears.
The te
Once dthe nathe nuremain
Pressiappear
Pressiprevio
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
102Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
you are being called
button to answer the call.
button to hang up or if you do not wish e incoming call.
WWW.MANUALS
Incoming call
The telephone must be switched on.
1 “CALL” —
Press the í
Press the ìto answer th
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Navigation system (optional) 1 The navigation system is switched off.
e navigation system is switched on but no stination has been specified.
e navigation system is switched on and stination guidance is active.
the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the ed system is displayed.
e separate COMAND (Cockpit Management and ystem) operator’s manual for notes on the tion system.
ng the è or ÿ button displays the next or us system.
WWW.MANUA103ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
2 Thde
3 Thde
Press requir
See thData Snaviga
Pressiprevio
P54.30-2985-27
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
104Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
TART” – trip odometer records distance t engine start after more than five hours of c key not being in steering lock position 2
ESET” – trip odometer records distance t engine start until it is reset
d driving range remaining and fuel tank
covered “AFTER START” respectively ESET”
ime “AFTER START” respectively ESET”
speed “AFTER START” respectively ESET”
fuel consumption “AFTER START” ely “AFTER RESET”
WWW.MANUALS
Trip computer 1 “AFTER Sfrom firselectroni
2 “AFTER Rfrom firs
3 Estimatecontents
4 Distance“AFTER R
5 Elapsed t“AFTER R
6 Average “AFTER R
7 Average respectiv
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Press the button è or ÿ repeatedly until the display (1, 2 or 3) appears.
To reset the “AFTER START” (1) or “AFTER RESET” (2) odometer memory at any time:
the relevant display (1 or 2) using the j or utton and press the J button in the instrument until the values are reset to “0”.
FTER START” trip odometer reading is atically reset after four hours of electronic key not in steering lock position 2.
WWW.MANUA105ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Press the j or k button until the “AFTER START” short distance memory (1), the “AFTER RESET” long distance memory (2) or estimated range remaining and fuel tank contents indicator (3) appears.
Important!
The reading in the display “TANK CONTENT” might be off by approximately +/– 2.2 US qt (2 l). Please refuel in time.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system.
Note:
The “AFTER START” display (1) always appears when the trip computer is called up.
Call upk bcluster
The “Aautombeing
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
106Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
no messages stored in the system
of messages stored in the system
or ÿ button repeatedly until the message memory (1 or 2) is displayed.
or k button if display (2) appears. alfunction messages will now be displayed page 233 for malfunction and warning splay (2) will reappear after you have he malfunction messages.
WWW.MANUALS
Malfunction message memory 1 There are
2 Number
Press the èmalfunction
Press the jThe stored min order. Seemessages. Discanned all t
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Should any malfunctions be stored while driving, they will reappear in the display (2) when the electronic key
Important!
ctions and warning messages are only indicated tain systems and displayed to a low level of detail.
alfunction and warning messages are simply a er with respect to the operation of certain s and do not replace the driver’s responsibility to in the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
ed maintenance and safety checks performed on hicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized des-Benz Center to address the malfunction and g messages. See page 233.
WWW.MANUA107ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
is in steering lock position 0 or removed from the steering lock.
Specific malfunctions can be recalled by pressing button J. Each malfunction or warning message must be acknowledged by pressing button J. Once all messages are cancelled, the odometer display should reappear.
Pressing the J button in the instrument cluster immediately switches to the next malfunction message.
The malfunction message memory will be cleared when the electronic key is turned in the steering lock to position 1 or 2. Should any subsequent malfunctions occur, they will be displayed in the malfunction message memory.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system.
Malfunfor cer
The mremindsystemmaintarequirthe veMercewarnin
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
108Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
WWW.MANUALS
Individual settings
R
8
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Mu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings 8 “STATION SEARCH USING” – radio adjustment
EQUENCY” – use the j or k button to ect a frequency
EMORY” – use the j or k button to select tored station (preset memory)
e page 110 for instructions on returning the ting menus to the factory settings
lection marker – indicates the setting selected
settings may only be performed with the vehicle dstill and with the key in steering lock position 1
WWW.MANUA109ltifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
2 “SET TIME HOURS”(Only vehicles without COMAND)
3 “SET TIME MINUTES”(Only vehicles without COMAND)
4 “12/24 HOURS” – the unit set is displayed in the instrument cluster (Only vehicles without COMAND)
5 “TEMP. INDICATOR” – the unit set is displayed in the outside temperature display in the instrument cluster and in the automatic air conditioner display
6 “DISPLAY VALUES IN” – the unit set is displayed in the trip and main odometer
7 “TEXT” – sets the language used in the multifunction display
“FRsel
“Ma s
9 Seset
10 Se
Notes:
These at stanor 2.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
110Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ting menus (4 to to their factory settings:
e individual setting preliminary ).
J button in the instrument cluster for ately 3 seconds. Display (9) will appear.
J button once more, the message O FACTORY SETTINGS” appears in the
idual setting preliminary display (1) will you do not press the J button within econds. The setting menus will not be
udio volume
adjust the volume of the system currently olume setting for each system (audio, vigation and voice recognition system) is tely.
n:
es the volume.
s the volume.
WWW.MANUALS
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the individual setting preliminary display (1) appear.
Press the j or k button until the required setting menu (2 to is displayed.
Pressing the æ or ç button sets the time in setting menus (2, 3) and controls the selection marker in setting menus (4 to 8).The settings made are stored and applied immediately.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear again after you have run through all the setting menus.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system.
Notes:
Settings can only be selected with the vehicle stationary or moving slowly.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will appear if you speed up.
The setting menu previously called up will reappear when the vehicle stops or slows down, providing no other system has been called up in the meantime.
To return set
• Call up thdisplay (1
• Press theapproxim
• Press the“RESET Tdisplay.
The indivappear ifabout 5 sreset.
Setting the a
You can onlyin use. The vtelephone, nastored separa
Setting butto
æ increas
ç reduce
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Fle
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Flexible service system (FSS)(service indicator)
The message is displayed for approx. 10 seconds when turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 2,
le driving when reaching the service warning old.
mbols and messages indicate the type of service erformed:
Service A
Service B
the following messages will appear in the display ervice A):
ICE A – IN xx DAYS”ICE A – IN xx MILES” (Canada: KM)ICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS”ICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx MILES” (Canada: KM)ICE A – DUE NOW”
xt service due date is displayed either in days or s, depending on your driving style.
he suggested service term has passed, the symbol essage appear for approx. 30 seconds and a signal s every time when turning the electronic key in g lock to position 2.
WWW.MANUA111xible service system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is directly related to the operating conditions of the vehicle.
The symbol 9 or ½ appears together with a message in the multifunction indicator prior to the next suggested service. Depending on operating conditions throughout the year, the next service is calculated and displayed in days or distance remaining.
or whithresh
The syto be p
9
½
One of(e.g. S
“SERV“SERV“SERV“SERV“SERV
The nein mile
Once tand msoundsteerin
100
40
60
80
60
40
mph
20km/h20
100
120
140
160
80
100180
200
220
240
160120 140
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
112Flexible service system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
necting vehicle battery for one or more e, such days will not be counted. Any such nted by the FSS can be added by your nz Center.
between services is determined by the type which the vehicle is used. For example, treme speeds, and cold starts combined stance driving in which the engine does not ng normal temperature, reduce the interval ices.
WWW.MANUALS
The service indicator disappears automatically after 30 seconds or if button J on the instrument cluster is pressed.
Calling up service indicator manually:
Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 1.
Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 94.
Press button j or k until the FSS indicator appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or previous system.
Important!
The FSS indicator is not an engine oil level indicator. See page 114 for engine oil level indicator.
Notes:
When discondays at a timdays not couMercedes-Be
The interval of driving fordriving at exwith short direach operatibetween serv
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Fle
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-Benz Center sets the counter mileage to
The multifunction display will show the question: “DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? –
RM BY PRESSING R”
button J on the instrument cluster again, and ntil a signal sounds. The message “SERVICE VAL HAS BEEN RESET” appears in the unction display.
w service indicator is displayed with the reset ce of 10 000 miles (Canada 15 000 km).
SS counter was inadvertently reset, have a des-Benz Center correct it.
er you choose to set your reference numbers, the led services as posted in the Service Booklet e followed to properly care for your vehicle.
WWW.MANUA113xible service system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km) and 365 days.
The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so:
Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel until the display appears. See page 94.
Press button j or k until the FSS indicator appears.
Press button J on the instrument cluster for approximately 2 seconds.
CONFI
Press hold uINTERmultif
The nedistan
If the FMerce
Howevschedumust b
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
114Engine oil level indicator
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
tronic key in steering lock to position 2.
trip odometer and main odometer, press or ÿ on the multifunction steering he display appears. See page 94.
j or k on the multifunction el repeatedly until the “MEASUREMENT ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL” engine oil level ears. This indicator is only a reminder. t can be cancelled by pressing button j e vehicle is not parked on level ground. An ding will be recorded if you do not cancel ment. Move the vehicle to level ground and in.
ic key in steering lock is not in position 2 if OIL LEVEL – SWITCH ON IGNITION” ears.
OIL LEVEL – MEASURING NOW” isplayed after approximately 3 seconds.
WWW.MANUALS
Engine oil level indicator
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan.
Turn the elec
To call up thebutton è wheel until t
Press buttonsteering wheCORRECT –indicator appMeasuremenor k if thincorrect reathe measuremeasure aga
The electronthe “ENGINEmessage app
The “ENGINEmessage is d
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS En
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
One of the following messages will subsequently appear on the indicator:
Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick, if it cannot be completed via the multifunction display.
ge 253.
case we recommend that you have the system d at a Mercedes-Benz Center.
alfunction and warning messages on page 233 ge 243 if an engine oil level indicator appears on ltifunction display when the engine is running.
gine oil level cannot be checked while the engine ing. The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – NOT WHEN E ON” message will appear.
e oil consumption
oil consumption checks should only be made he break-in period. During the break-in period, oil consumption may be noticed and is normal. nt driving at high engine speeds results in
sed consumption.
WWW.MANUA115gine oil level indicator
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – O.K.”No oil needs to be added.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.0 QUART”(Canada: 1.0 L)
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.5 QUART”(Canada: 1.5 L)
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 2.0 QUART”(Canada: 2.0 L)
See page 253 for instructions on adding engine oil.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – REDUCE OIL LEVEL”Do not overfill the engine.Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The message “PERF. SERV. ON TIME” (perform service [engine oil level check] on time) will be displayed if a proper oil level check cannot be performed. The engine oil level check can be repeated after a short time.
See pa
In thischecke
Note:
See mand pathe mu
The enis runnENGIN
Engin
Engineafter thigherFrequeincrea
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
116Exterior lamp switch
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
g lamps plus low beam or high beam mps (combination switch pushed forward)
ng lamps, right (turn left one stop)
ng lamps, left (turn left two stops)
og lamps (pull out one stop) with parking and/or low beam headlamps on. Green tor lamp in lamp switch comes on.
g lamp (pull out to 2nd detent) in addition amps. Yellow indicator lamp in lamp switch on.
ps
hicle is parked on the street the standing or left side parking lamps) can be turned he vehicle more visible to passing vehicles.
lamps cannot be operated with the y in steering lock position 2.
WWW.MANUALS
Exterior lamp switch
D Off
C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps) Canada only: When the engine is running, the low beam is additionally switched on.
B Parkinheadla
ˆ Standi
‚ Standi
… Front flamps indica
„ Rear foto fog lcomes
Standing lam
When the velamps (right on, making t
The standingelectronic ke
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ex
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Notes: Daytime running lamps (Canada only)
the engine is running and the selector lever is in ng position, the low beam headlamps (includes g lamps, side marker lamps, taillamps and plate lamps) are automatically switched on.
shifting from a driving position to position “N” the low beam switches off (2 seconds delay).
httime driving the exterior lamp switch should ed to position B to permit activation of the
eam headlamps.
security illumination
exiting the vehicle after driving with the exterior on, they switch on again for added illumination roximately 30 seconds after closing the last door.
mp-on time period can be changed at your des-Benz Center.
WWW.MANUA117terior lamp switch
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds and the message “SWITCH OFF LIGHTS” in the multifunction indicator appears if the vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing lamps) are not switched off.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.
Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the exterior lamp switch is turned to position D.
When a driviparkinlicense
When or “P”,
For nigbe turnhigh b
Night
When lamps for appThe laMerce
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
118Headlamp cleaning system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
located in the center console.
p washer can be activated with the y in steering lock position 2.
symbol side of switch.
WWW.MANUALS
Headlamp cleaning system (optional on model CLK 430, standard on model CLK 55 AMG)
The switch is
The headlamelectronic ke
Briefly press
P82.15-2007-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Co
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Combination switch 3 High beam flasher (high beam available independent of exterior lamp switch position)
rn signals, right
rn signals, left
al minor directional changes, such as changing n a highway, move combination switch to the f resistance only and hold it there.
rate the turn signals continuously, move the nation switch past the point of resistance (up or . The switch is automatically canceled when the g wheel is turned to a large enough degree.
ignal failure
of the turn signals fails, the turn signal indicator flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate.
WWW.MANUA119mbination switch
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Low beam (exterior lamp switch position B)
2 High beam (exterior lamp switch position B)
4 Tu
5 Tu
To signlanes opoint o
To opecombidown)steerin
Turn s
If one system
P54.25-2034-26
2
3
44
5
5
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
120Combination switch
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ld wiper
r off
ittent wiping les with rain sensor: One initial wipe, s between wipes are automatically
olled by a rain sensor monitoring the ss of the windshield.)
:
switch in this position, one wipe occurs turning the electronic main key in steering rom position 0.
les with rain sensor: t leave in intermittent setting when vehicle en to an automatic car wash or during hield cleaning. Wiper will operate in nce of water spray at windshield, and wiper e damaged as a result.
al wiper speed
iper speed
WWW.MANUALS
6 Control for windshield wiper/washer system:
Push briefly for single wipe without adding washer fluid (use only when windshield is wet).
Push past detent and hold to activate wiper and washer.
Notes:
The windshield washer reservoir, hoses and nozzles are automatically heated.
See page 256 for refilling windshield washer/headlamp cleaning system.
7 Windshie
0 Wipe
I Interm(vehicpausecontrwetne
Notes
With whenlock f
VehicDo nois takwindspresemay b
II Norm
III Fast w
P54.25-2033-266
7
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ha
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Windshield wiper smears Hazard warning flasher switch
zard warning flasher can be activated with the located in the dashboard.
vate hazard warning flasher, press switch once. ctivate, press switch again.
he hazard warning flasher activated, the nation switch in position for either left or right nd the electronic main key in steering lock n 2, only the respective left or right side turn
s will operate.
WWW.MANUA121zard warning flasher
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
If the windshield wiper smears the windshield, even during rain, activate the washer system as often as necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be mixed in the correct ratio, see page 256.
Blocked windshield wiper
If the windshield wiper becomes blocked (for example, due to snow), switch off the wiper.
For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove electronic key from steering lock. Remove blockage.
Activate combination switch again (electronic key in steering lock position 1).
The haswitch
To actiTo dea
Note:
With tcombiturn, apositiosignal
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
122Automatic climate control
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
P83.40-2156-29
2
4
WWW.MANUALS
Automatic climate control
1
3 3
6
* *
Mercedes-BenzDOLBY-STEREO
5
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
1 Air volume control for center air outlets, turn wheel up to open.
The temperature selector should be left at the desired temperature setting. The temperature selected is
d as quickly as possible.
stem will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a or lower temperature.
tomatic climate control removes considerable re from the air during operation in the cooling It is normal for water to drip on the ground h ducts in the underbody.
sired interior temperature can be selected tely for the left and right side of the passenger rtment.
WWW.MANUA123tomatic climate control
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
2 Air volume control for side air outlet.
To open air outlets: Turn wheel to position i.
3 Center air outlet, adjustable
4 Side air outlet, adjustable
5 Display and controls
The system is always at operational readiness, except when manually switched off.
The automatic climate control only operates with the engine running.
reache
The syhigher
The aumoistumode. throug
The deseparacompa
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
124Automatic climate control
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
t
irculation
indow defroster
tribution, manual
y mode
ume, manual
al engine heat utilization
g — automatic mode
d right U button for automatic mode.
sly press both f and g buttons for setting of 72°F.
nd distribution are controlled .
can be used all year around.
WWW.MANUALS
Display and controls
Press the desired button to activate, indicator lamp is on while activated.
U Automatic mode
f Raise temperature
g Lower temperature
P Defros
O Air rec
F Rear w
b Air dis
S Econom
ï Air vol
T Residu
Basic settin
Press left an
Simultaneoutemperature
QAir volume aautomatically
This setting
0 MAX
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Economy Defrosting
heels (2) to position i to open left and right r outlets (4). Adjust side air outlets upward.
P button. Maximum heated and automatically lled amount of air is directed to the windshield de windows.
P button once again to return to previous .
WWW.MANUA125tomatic climate control
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The function of this setting corresponds to the automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not possible to air condition in this setting.
Press S button to activate.
Press S button once again to return to previous setting.
Special settings (use only for short duration)
Defogging windows
Switch off O button.
Press left and right U buttons.
Press button b repeatedly until air is directed upward.
UTurn wheels (2) to position i to open left and right side air outlets (4). Adjust side air outlets upward.
Turn wside ai
Press controand si
PPress setting
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
126Automatic climate control
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
tion
utton for each side repeatedly until the mbol is displayed.
utton to return to automatic mode.
side of rocker switch ï until the wer speed is attained. A choice of 7 blower ilable.
automatic climate control off, press – side tch ï until symbol OFF is displayed.
supply to the vehicle interior is shut off.
g, use this setting only temporarily, e windshield could fog up.
automatic climate control on again, press r + side of ï.
WWW.MANUALS
Rear window defroster
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
To select, press F button.
To cancel, press F button again.
Notes:
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed before activating the defroster.
The rear window defroster consumes a large amount of electrical power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the defroster as soon as the window is clear.
The defroster is automatically turned off after a maximum of 12 minutes of operation.
If several power consumers are turned on simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged, it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside the switch starts blinking.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the defroster automatically turns itself back on.
Air distribu
TPress b brequested sy
Press U b
Air volume
Press – or +requested blospeeds is ava
To switch theof rocker swi
IThe fresh air
While drivinotherwise th
To switch theU, P o
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Air recirculation Residual engine heat utilization
he engine switched off, it is possible to continue g the interior for a short while.
lume and distribution are controlled atically.
ct:
lectronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 0 or e key.
T button
nction selection will not activate if the battery level is insufficient.
cel:
T button.
stem will automatically shut off
ou turn electronic key in steering lock to sition 2,
er approx. 30 minutes,
he battery voltage drops.
WWW.MANUA127tomatic climate control
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
This mode can be selected to temporarily reduce the entry of annoying odors or dust into the vehicle’s interior.
Outside air is not supplied to the vehicle’s interior.
To select, press O button.
To cancel, press O button again.
The system will automatically switch from recirculated air to fresh air
• after approx. 5 minutes at outside temperatures below approx. 40°F (5°C),
• after approx. 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approx. 40°F (5°C),
• after approx. 5 minutes, if button S is pressed.
If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch from recirculated air back to fresh air.
At high outside temperatures, the system automatically engages the recirculated air mode thereby increasing the cooling capacity performance, switching to partially fresh air within 30 minutes.
With theatin
Air voautom
To sele
Turn eremov
Press
This fucharge
To can
Press
The sy
• if ypo
• aft
• if t
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
128Automatic climate control
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
is equipped with an air conditioner system 134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a epairs should always be performed by a nician, and refrigerant should be collected
system for recycling.
WWW.MANUALS
Dust filter
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.
Notes:
Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air flow–through exhaust slots below the rear window.
Also keep the air intake grille in front of windshield free of snow and debris.
Important!
This vehicle that uses R–refrigerant. Rqualified techin a recovery
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Audio and telephone, operation Operating safety
onal equipment
y and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby atories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction m is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories sing Corporation.
ing!
lternations made to electronic components ause malfunctions.
adio, cassette deck, CD changer1 and one1 are interconnected. Therefore, when
f the components is defective or has not been ed/replaced properly this may impair the
ion of other components.
malfunctions might seriously impair the ting safety of your vehicle.
commend that you have any service work or ations on electronic components done in an rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
WWW.MANUA129dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
These instructions are intended to help you become acquainted with your Mercedes-Benz vehicle radio. They contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions.
The right to correct errors and make technical amendments is reserved.
1 Opti
DolblaborsysteLicen
Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, system settings should be entered with the vehicle at standstill and systems should be operated by the driver only when traffic conditions permit. Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Warn
Any acan c
The rtelephone oremovfunct
Theseopera
We realternautho
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
130Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
anel tte slot is located behind the display panel. on playing cassettes, see page 137
meric keypad fororage and frequency entry, see page 136 access, see page 138 and 143
telephone, see page 144
button, see page 136 and 143
WWW.MANUALS
Operating and display elements
1 On/off, volume, see page 133
2 Telephone mode selector, see page 144
3 Seek, see page 135, 138 and 142
4 Radio mode selector, see page 135
5 Tune, see page 135 and 136Fast forward/reverse, see page 139 and 142
6 CD mode selector, see page 141
7 Display pThe casseFor notes
8 Alpha-nustation stCD/Trackoptional
9 Function
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
10 Soft keys forradio band selection, see page 135
de number is shown on the Radio code card, ed with the radio.
tant!
leave the Radio code card in the vehicle. Keep it in place.
WWW.MANUA131dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
tone controls, see page 133scan, see page 136Tape eject, see page 138Tape track select, see page 138Dolby, see page 139CD random/repeat, see page 143
11 Tape mode selector, see page 137
Anti-theft system
If the power supply to the radio has been interrupted, “CODE” will appear on the display when it is next switched on. The radio will
only work after the five-digit code has been entered using the buttons on the right-hand control panel.
The cosuppli
Impor
Never a safe
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
132Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
soft key operation
ructions, the alpha-numeric keypad (right face) and the function buttons (left side of e) are referred to as “buttons” and the four
e display are referred to as “soft keys”.
directly on the radio display face.
WWW.MANUALS
Entering the code number
Switch on the radio. “CODE” will appear on the display. Using the buttons on the alpha-numeric keypad, enter the five digit code. Confirm by pressing the “OK” key.
If an incorrect code has been entered and confirmed, “CODE” will reappear on the display. The correct code must be entered once again.
If an incorrect code is entered three times, “WAIT” will appear on the display and the radio will be locked out for about 10 minutes.
Note:
The lock out time will only count down if the radio is left switched on.
Button and
In these instside of radio the radio fackeys under th
Note:
Do not press
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Operation Audio functions
D key is used to select the BASS, TREBLE, and BALANCE functions. Settings for bass and are stored separately for the cassette and CD . Tone level settings are identified by the vertical he center (flat) setting is shown by one longer bar center of the display.
Press the AUD key repeatedly until “BASS” appears in the display.
Press the AUD key repeatedly until “TREBLE” appears in the display.
Press the “+” key to increase “-” key to decrease the level.
WWW.MANUA133dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Switching on and off
Press the control knob .
The radio is switched off when the ignition key is turned to position 0 or removed from the ignition. The radio is switched on again when the ignition key is turned to position 1 or 2.
Note:
The radio can also be switched on even if the ignition key is not inserted, but will switch itself off automatically after one hour to conserve vehicle battery power.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the control knob — turning the knob clockwise will increase the volume, counterclockwise will decrease the volume.
The AUFADERtreble modesbars. Tin the
Bass
Treble
or the
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
134Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ll audio functions
Push and hold down the “AUD” key. All audio functions (bass, treble, balance and fader) are set to center or flat positions, and
s adjusted to a pre-set level.
WWW.MANUALS
Fader1
Press the AUD key repeatedly until “FADER” appears on the display. Press the “R” key to move the sound to the rear speakers or the “F” key to
move the sound to the front speakers.
Balance
Press the AUD key repeatedly until “BALANCE” appears in the display.
Press the “L” key to move the sound to the left speaker or the “R” key to move the sound to the right speaker.
1 not available on all models
Centering a
the volume i
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Radio mode Manual tuning
Press either the or button. Step-by-step tuning in ascending or descending order of frequency will take place.
st three tuning steps will take place without g. The radio will then be muted and high-speed will take place until the button is released.llowing tuning intervals will be shown on the :
uning
ither the or button. The radio will tune next receivable station.
200 kHz
10 kHz
Channels 1-7
WWW.MANUA135dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Selecting radio mode
Press button.
Selecting the band
Press the key located below the desired band. The band selected is shown in the top line of the display.
The firmutintuningThe fodisplay
Seek t
Press eto the
Frequency ranges: FM 87.9 — 107.9 MHz
AM 530 — 1710 kHz
WB approx. 162 MHz
FM
AM
WB
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
136Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ons
ber button down for approximately e currently displayed frequency is stored
ed station button. The storage procedure is a short signal tone.
station from memory
ired station button.
ency input (AM and FM only)
Select the band. Press the “ button and enter the desired frequency using the alpha-numeric keypad. Frequencies outside of the
nges (frequencies specified on page 135) cepted. The frequency input mode is o button is pressed within 4 seconds.
WWW.MANUALS
Scan tuning
Press the SC key. Each strong receivable station on the band selected will be tuned in for 8 seconds. The first scan will tune only the stations with a
high signal strength. The second scan will tune every receivable station. By pressing either the , ,
or buttons, or the “SC” key the scan mode can be cancelled.
Station memory
Ten stations can be stored in the AM and FM bands via the alpha-numeric keypad. The “0” button corresponds to location 10. Weatherband
(WB) channels 1 to 7 can be retrieved via the alpha-numeric keypad and are preset at the factory.
Storing stati
Hold the num2 seconds. Thon the selectconfirmed by
Retrieving a
Press the des
Direct frequ
frequency rawill not be accancelled if n
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Cassette mode When playing mono recorded tapes (e.g. books) through a stereo system the sound from one track might bleed to
er track, despite setting the balance to the full full right speakers.
tant!
isplay is in the down position for more than onds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will ue at 5 second intervals until the display is ed to its normal position.
The radio will switch to cassette mode. Track 1 will be played and “SIDE 1” displayed. Track 1 is the side of the cassette which is facing
ds. The cassette deck will automatically detect the f tape and switch the equalization automatically. ette symbol in the display indicates that a tape is mechanism. This symbol appears in all modes but cassette mode.
ssette will not be ejected when the radio is ed off or another mode is selected.
WWW.MANUA137dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Note:
Vehicles equipped with the COMAND system do not come with a factory installed cassette mechanism. A standard 1/8” stereo phono plug for auxiliary audio input (located in glove box) is provided for connection of a portable battery operated cassette player or any other portable device which uses a headphone output. Please refer to the COMAND operating manual for information concerning the activation of the audio input.
Playing cassettes
Press the “TAPE” button. When the eject (EJ) key is pressed, the display folds down and the cassette slot becomes visible. Push the cassette into the slot until it engages. The cassette will be pulled in automatically.
Notes:
Do not press directly on the radio display face.
Return the display panel to its normal position by folding it back up and pressing gently on the display frame to lock in place.
the othleft or
Impor
If the d20 seccontinreturn
upwartype oA cassin the not in
The caswitch
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
138Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ion
Press the track selection (TRK) key. The current track will be displayed as “SIDE 1” or “SIDE 2”. The track will be changed automatically at the end of the tape.
forwards/backwards
Press the button. “SEEK FWD” will be shown on the display and the track search will run the tape forwards to the start of the next track.
Press the button. “SEEK RWD” will be shown on the display and the track search will run the tape backwards to the start of the
ly playing. Track search can be interrupted he same button again.
WWW.MANUALS
If a cassette is in the mechanism, cassette mode can be selected by using the “TAPE” button. If no cassette has been inserted, the display will show “NO TAPE”.
Cassette eject
Press the eject (EJ) key. The display will fold down and the cassette will be ejected. Remove the cassette, then fold the display back up manually. The radio will switch back to radio mode automatically.
Note:
The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is switched off.
Important!
If the display is in the down position for more than 20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will continue at 5 second intervals until the display is returned to its normal position.
Track select
Track search
track currentby pressing t
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Note: Scanning
Press the “SC” key. Each track on the cassette will be played for 8 seconds in ascending order.
ginning of a track can only be located if there is a of at least 4 seconds between tracks.
ill be interrupted if the , , , s or the “SC” key is pressed.
NR1 (noise reduction system)
To enable optimum reproduction of cassettes recorded using the Dolby B system, press the “AUD” key followed by the NR key so the
n the display is not highlighted. To turn off B noise reduction, press the “NR” key so the “NR” display is highlighted.
y and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby atories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction m is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories sing Corporation.
WWW.MANUA139dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.
Fast forward/reverse
Press the button. “FORWARD” will appear on the display and fast forward will start.
Press the button. “REWIND” will appear on the display and fast reverse will start.
Fast forward/reverse is stopped by pressing the same button again, or it will stop automatically at the beginning or the end of the tape. The track will automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape and play will begin.
Note:
The bebreak
Scan wbutton
Dolby
“NR” iDolbyin the
1 DolblaborsysteLicen
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
140Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
om time to time with a commercially ning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays,
e used.
D in its container after use. Protect CDs d direct sunlight.
ipment
nger1 is a Class 1 laser product. There is invisible laser radiation if the cover is amaged.
ove the cover. The CD changer1 does not parts which can be serviced by the fety reasons, have any service work be necessary performed only by rsonnel.
WWW.MANUALS
CD mode
General notes on CD mode
Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode, “TEMP HIGH” will appear in the display and muting will take place. The unit will then switch back to radio mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating level.
Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are too low, “TEMP LOW” will be displayed, but the CD will play. It will be sensitive to skipping if you are driving over rough roads.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback.
Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not write on the CDs or apply any label to the CDs.
Clean CDs fravailable cleaetc. should b
Replace the Cfrom heat an
1 Optional equ
Warning!
The CD chaa danger ofopened or d
Do not remcontain anyuser. For sawhich may qualified pe
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
CD changer installed Loading/emptying the CD magazine
he changer door to the right and press the eject . The magazine will be ejected. Remove the ine. Pull out the CD tray until its stop is reached ace the CDs in the recess of the tray, label side up. he tray into the magazine in the direction shown arrow. Insert the loaded magazine into the r.
tant!
the door after the magazine has been inserted.
g CDs
he “CD” button. The CD most recently played will t the point where it was last switched off. CDs in the magazine can be selected by using the preset buttons 1-6.
The magazine slot number of the selected CD will then be displayed after “CD”. The number of the track being played will be displayed after “TRACK”.
WWW.MANUA141dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 CD changer1
2 CD magazine
3 CD tray
4 CD
If a CD changer1 is installed, it can be operated from the front control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must be installed for CD playing.
1 Optional equipment
Slide tbuttonmagazand plPush tby thechange
Impor
Close
Playin
Press tstart astoredstation
3
2
2
1
4
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
142Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
/reverse
button and hold it down for audible fast
button and hold it down for audible
The search will stop when the button is released. The relative time of the track will be displayed during the search. The search mode will
beginning or end of the CD is reached.
key. Each track will be played for 8 seconds order. The search will stop at the track in e , , , buttons or the ressed.
WWW.MANUALS
If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, “NO CD” and the corresponding slot number will be displayed
(e.g.“NO CD3”). After the last track on a CD has been played, the next CD will automatically be selected and played.
Skipping tracks forwards/backwards
Press the button. The next track on the CD will be played.
Press the button. If the track has been playing for more than 10 seconds, it will revert to the start of that track. If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it will revert to the preceding track. To skip several tracks, the respective button must be pressed until the desired track is reached. If the beginning or end of the CD is reached during the search, the first or last track will be played.
Fast forward
Press the forward.
Press the reverse.
cancel if the
Scanning
Press the SCin ascendingquestion if th“SC” key is p
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Random play/repeat function Direct track selection
can be selected directly using the buttons on the numeric keypad. Press the “ function button, d by the track number.
WWW.MANUA143dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The tracks of the current CD are played in random order when the random feature (RDM) is selected. Press the RDM key to switch on, and press RDM again to switch off.
When the repeat function (RPT) has been selected, a particular track can be played for as many times as desired. Press the RPT key to switch
on, and press RPT again to switch off.
Note:
Both functions cannot be used simultaneously.
Tracksalpha-followe
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
144Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ephone number and starting dialing
Enter the desired telephone number using the alpha-numeric keypad. The number can have up to 32 digits, but only 13 of these can be
e dialing process is started by pressing the The entered number can be corrected using y.
Press the CLR key briefly — and the last digit will be deleted.
Press the CLR key longer — and number will be deleted.
he phone book
stored in the telephone memory can be either name or number entries. The tents from the portable phone must be and the telephone menu must be selected ll up the phone book. Refer to the nload” section of the cellular telephone
ide for more information.
WWW.MANUALS
Telephone operation
Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz integrated cellular telephone 1 can be performed and displayed via the car radio. Further instructions for operating the car telephone can be found in the operation guide for the cellular telephone 1.
Switching the telephone on and off
Switching on: Press the button, “TEL” appears in the corner of the display.
Switching off: Press and hold the button until the telephone symbol “TEL” no longer appears in the display, or press the “PWR” button on the phone’s keypad.
1 Optional equipment
Entering telprocess
displayed. ThSND button. the “CLR” ke
the complete
Calling up t
The numberscalled up viamemory condownloaded in order to ca“Memory dowoperation gu
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Switching between name search and number search Placing a call
When a number or a name has been selected using the method described above, press the SND key.
al repeat dialing (redial)
st number entered can be re-selected by pressing D key once and the call can be placed by pressing D key a second time. The last dialed telephone r is shown on the display. Using the , , r button, the numbers stored in the re-dial ry of the telephone can be selected.
The abbreviation L and the number in the memory are shown in the top line of the display.
WWW.MANUA145dio system
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Press ABC key — Name search
Press NUM key — Number search
Searching and selecting phone book entries by name
Press the ABC key. The current name is shown on the display. The stored entries in alphabetical order can be selected using the or button. By pressing the
or buttons, the stored entries can be selected according to alphabetical initial letters (e.g. A-Adam, B-Brown, M-Miller).
Searching and selecting phone book entries by number
Press the NUM key. The current number is shown on the display. The stored entries can be selected in numerical order using the or button. By pressing the or buttons, the stored entries can be selected in increments of 5 (e.g. Entry no. 2, Entry no. 7, etc.).
Manu
The lathe SNthe SNnumbe
omemo
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
146Audio system
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
malfunctions
changer1, and Mercedes-Benz integrated hone1 are part of a fiberoptic networked re of one of the components can lead to of the other components. Please contact
zed Mercedes-Benz Center or call ERCedes for more information in the event
tion.
ipment
WWW.MANUALS
Accepting incoming call in telephone mode
With an incoming call, the ringing tone will be heard and the message “CALL” appears in the display. Press the SND key to answer the call.
Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the background (telephone symbol in the display), then a switch is made automatically to telephone when an incoming call is received. The audio source is muted, the ringing tone is heard and the message “CALL” appears. After the call has been terminated, the previously selected audio source is resumed.
Terminating call
A current call can be terminated by pressing the END key.
Component
The radio, CDcellular telepsystem. Failumalfunctionsyour authori1-800-FOR-Mof a malfunc
1 Optional equ
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Power windows Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
switch in to resistance point:
to open
to close
e switch when window is in desired position.
ing!
closing the windows, be sure that there is no r of anyone being harmed by the closing dure.
losing procedure can be immediately reversed her pressing the switch k or pressing n Œ on the remote control, and holding it.
leaving the vehicle, always remove the onic key from the steering lock, and lock the le. Do not leave children unattended in the le, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. pervised use of vehicle equipment can cause s personal injury.
WWW.MANUA147erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Power window switches located on center console
Press
k
j
Releas
P54.25-2031-26
Warn
Whendangeproce
The cby eitbutto
WhenelectrvehicvehicUnsuseriou
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
148Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
indows can also be closed with the infrared ol while locking the vehicle doors or trunk,
ng power windows
supply was interrupted (battery or low), the windows cannot be opened by eature.
nize the express feature, press j side of w switch until the window is completely old for additional 2 seconds. Repeat r each window.
ic full opening procedure of the windows e restored.
WWW.MANUALS
Express opening and closing of front door windows
Press switch k or j past resistance point and release — window opens or closes completely.
To interrupt procedure, briefly press k or j.
If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop during the last few inches before closure and open slightly.
When pressing and holding the switch j to close the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked during the last few inches before closure, it will stop but not open slightly.
Note:
The power wremote contrsee page 32.
Synchronizi
If the power disconnectedthe express f
To resynchropower windoclosed and hprocedure fo
The automatshould now b
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the electronic key from the steering lock and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Sliding/pop-up roof (optional on model CLK 430, standard on model CLK 55 AMG)
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
itch is illuminated when the exterior lamps are ed on (except standing lamps).
iding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed lly should an electrical malfunction occur, see 86.
iding/pop-up roof can also be closed with the d remote control while locking the vehicle doors k, see page 32.
ing!
closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that is no danger of anyone being harmed by the g procedure.
losing procedure can be immediately reversed her moving the switch in direction (1) or (3) ssing button Œ on the remote control, and
ng it.
WWW.MANUA149erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 to slide roof open
2 to slide roof closed
3 to raise roof at rear
4 to lower roof at rear
The swswitch
Notes:
The slmanuapage 2
The slinfrareor trun
Warn
Whenthereclosin
The cby eitor preholdi
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
150Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ng sliding/pop-up roof
supply was interrupted (battery or low), or if the sliding/pop-up roof is
ng closing/opening procedure, the system chronized.
electronic key in steering lock to ove and hold switch in direction (3) until op-up roof is completely raised at rear, and tional 1 second.
WWW.MANUALS
With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract.
Express opening of sliding/pop-up roof
Move switch past resistance point and release — the sliding/pop-up roof slides open automatically.
To interrupt procedure, briefly move switch in any direction.
Synchronizi
If the power disconnectedblocked durihas to be syn
To do so, turnposition 2, mthe sliding/phold for addi
P68.00-2101-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Interior lighting 2 Press to switch interior and reading lamps on or off.
ess to switch rear passenger compartment lamp or off.
ess to switch reading lamp on or off.
ce lamps, exit lamps in doors
mps are switched on and off by the door contact es.
vent the vehicle battery from being discharged, oors open all interior lamps go out after imately 5 minutes.
WWW.MANUA151erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Automatic interior lighting
Press once and the automatic interior lighting is activated.
Interior lamps are switched on, and off (soft fade) delayed, when unlocking or locking the vehicle, or when opening or closing a door. However, there will be no (soft fade) delay when the electronic key is in steering lock position 2.
Press again and interior lamps remain switched off, even when centrally unlocking or opening a door.
3 Pron
4 Pr
Entran
The laswitch
Note:
To prewith dapprox
1 4
3
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
152Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
sors down to protect against sun glare.
ters through a side window, disengage ner mounting, pivot it to the side, and slide red position.
WWW.MANUALS
Rear window sunshade (optional on model CLK 430, standard CLK 55 AMG)
The switch is located on the center console.
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
1 Hold to raise
2 Hold to lower
Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.
Sun visors
Swing sun vi
If sunlight envisor from init to the desi
P54.25-2032-26
1
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Illuminated vanity mirrors Interior
e compartments, armrest and cup holder
ing!
lp avoid personal injury during a collision or n maneuver, exercise care when stowing
s. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if ble. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than at backs. Do not place anything on the shelf the rear window.
ge nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
ing!
compartment lids closed. This will help to nt stored objects from being thrown about juring vehicle occupants during an accident
udden maneuvers.
WWW.MANUA153erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
With the visor engaged in its inner mounting, the lamp is switched on by opening the cover.
The lamp goes out automatically after approximately 5 minutes.
Storag
Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Warn
To hesuddethingpossithe sebelow
Lugga
Warn
Keep preveand inand s
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
154Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
partments in center console
partment in armrest: (4) and lift lid.
partment under armrest: (5) and lift lid.
til it engages in lock.
r: cover (6) slightly. The cover opens .
WWW.MANUALS
Glove box
1 Unlocking: Turn mechanical key to vertical position and remove.
2 Locking: Turn mechanical key to the right and remove.
3 Opening: Pull on handle.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. See page 25 for instructions on how to remove the mechanical key from the electronic main key (e.g. for valet parking service).
Storage com
To open comPress button
To open comPress button
To close: Lower lid un
To open coveTouch top of automatically
P68.00-2067-26
3
1
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Cup holder in center console Notes:
ht claw is adjustable to accommodate most ner sizes.
itional second (smaller size) container can be in the cup holder.
g liquids (e.g. soda or coffee) could restrict the ent of the claw. Refer to page 296 for cleaning
p holder.
n!
up holder closed while traveling. Place only ners that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.
fill containers to a height where the contents spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot .
WWW.MANUA155erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
To open cup holder: Briefly press button (7). The cup holder opens automatically.
To store cup holder: Push button (7) down until cup holder engages. Close cover (6).
The rigcontai
An addplaced
Spillinmovemthe cu
Cautio
Keep ccontai
Do notcould liquids
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
156Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ders closed while traveling. Place only at fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.
ntainers to a height where the contents ring vehicle maneuvers, especially hot
WWW.MANUALS
Cup holder in rear bench armrest
Briefly press drawer (1) and pull out to its detent.
Caution!
Keep cup holcontainers th
Do not fill cocould spill duliquids.
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Ashtrays Prior to removing the ashtray insert, move the gear selector lever to position “N”.
ove ashtray:
liding knob (1) toward the right to eject the
all ashtray:
insert into ashtray frame and push down to .
ing!
ve front ashtray only with vehicle standing ith the gear selector lever in position “N”,
ff the engine and set the parking brake. wise the vehicle might move as a result of ended contact with the gear selector lever.
WWW.MANUA157erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Center console, front
By touching the bottom of the cover lightly, the ashtray opens automatically.
To rem
Push sinsert.
To inst
Installengage
Warn
Remostill. Wturn oOtherunint
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
158Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
htray:
) down and pull out insert (3).
tray:
down to engage.
WWW.MANUALS
Rear seats To remove as
Push cover (2
To install ash
Push ashtray
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Lighter Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2. Push in lighter (1); it will pop out automatically when
hter socket can be used to accommodate cal accessories up to maximum 85 W.
ing!
touch the heating element or sides of the r, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only.
leaving the vehicle always remove the onic key from the steering lock. Do not leave en unattended in the vehicle, or with access
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle ment may cause serious personal injury.
WWW.MANUA159erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
hot.
The ligelectri
Warn
Neverlighte
Whenelectrchildrto an equip
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
160Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
, right backrest lock, visible in unlocked
, left backrest lock, visible in unlocked
WWW.MANUALS
Enlarged cargo area – split folding rear seat backrest
1 Locking handle, left backrest
2 Locking handle, right backrest
3 Pass-through
The two sections can be folded down separately to enlarge the cargo area.
4 Indicatorposition
5 Indicatorposition
1 23
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Fold down:
vent unauthorized persons from access to the always lock backrest in its upright position.
Warning!
s lock backrest in its upright position when eat bench is occupied by passengers, cargo is carried in the trunk, or the extended cargo s not in use.
WWW.MANUA161erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Pull locking handle and fold backrest forward.
Set up:
Pull backrest up until it locks in its upright position. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest. Note:
To pretrunk,
Alwayrear sbeingarea i
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
162Interior equipment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle ly on the load distribution. It is therefore d to load the vehicle according to the shown, with the heaviest items being ds the front of the vehicle.
items being carried against front or rear s, and fasten them as securely as possible.
portion of the cargo should always be kept sible since it influences the handling
cs of the vehicle.
the preferred place to carry objects.
cargo area should only be used for items fit in the trunk alone.
WWW.MANUALS
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated on the certification label which can be found on the left door pillar.
The handlingdepend greatrecommendeillustrations placed towar
Always placeseat backrest
The heaviestas low as poscharacteristi
Notes:
The trunk is
The enlargedwhich do not
P82.55-2002-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Int
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Cargo tie down rings
g
lly secure cargo by applying even load on all four ith rope of sufficient strength to hold down the
Warning!
WWW.MANUA163erior equipment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Rin
Carefurings wcargo.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf below the rear window.
Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open while pass-through is not closed and seat backrest sections not locked in their upright positions. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
164Telephone
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
eneral
ttention to the road must always be his/ focus when driving. For your safety ty of others, we recommend that you
a safe location and stop before placing telephone call. If you choose to use the hile driving, please use the hands-free
only use the telephone when road and itions permit.
ictions prohibit the driver from using a phone while driving a vehicle.
d that at a speed of just 30 mph tely 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering f approximately 50 feet (approximately second.
te radio transmitters equipped with a ttached antenna (i.e. without being o an external antenna) from inside the le the engine is running. Doing so could lfunction of the vehicle’s electronic sibly resulting in an accident and jury.
WWW.MANUALS
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc..
Note:
With large objects stored in the parcel net do not slide the seat fully forward, it could damage them.
Telephone, g
Warning!
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Warning!
A driver’s aher primaryand the safepull over toor taking a telephone wdevice and traffic cond
Some jurisdcellular tele
Bear in min(approximaa distance o14 m) every
Never operabuilt-in or aconnected tvehicle whilead to a masystem, pospersonal in
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Cellular telephone
WWW.MANUA165lephone
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The vehicle is prepared for the installation of a cellular telephone. For further information and installation contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in an safe location before answering or placing a call.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
166Garage door opener
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
emote control is capable of operating up to tely controlled objects.
s of garage door openers are incompatible grated opener. If you should experience ith programming the transmitter, contact
zed Mercedes-Benz Center, or call nz Client Assistance Center (in the USA 0-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in -800-387-0100.
amming a garage door opener, the door r down.
amming or operating the remote e sure there is no possibility of anyone ed by the moving door.
WWW.MANUALS
Garage door opener
1 Signal transmitter keys
2 Indicator lamp
3 Portable remote control transmitter
The built-in rthree separa
Notes:
Certain typewith the intedifficulties wyour authoriMercedes-Beonly) at 1-80Canada) at 1
12
3
Warning!
When progrmoves up o
When progrcontrol makbeing harm
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ga
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-held transmitter button and the desired integrated
ote control button. Do not release the buttons til completing step 4.
e indicator lamp on the integrated remote control ll flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the icator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be eased (the rapid flashing lamp indicates ccessful programming of the new frequency nal). To program the remaining two buttons, low steps 1 though 4.
repeated attempts, you do not successfully m the integrated remote control device to learn nal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door could be equipped with the “rolling code ”.
WWW.MANUA167rage door opener
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modification not expressly approved by party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control:
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the inside rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.
remun
4. Thwiindrelsusigfol
Note:
If afterprograthe sigopenerfeature
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
168Garage door opener
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ess and release the programmed d remote control transmit button. Press se same button a second time to complete
ing process. (Some garage door openers ire you to do this procedure a third time to the training.)
the garage door operation by pressing the ed button on the integrated remote
ansmitter.
ogramming:
amming, your hand-held transmitter may stop transmitting. Continue to press and
grated remote control transmitter button through 4 in the “Programming” portion) ess and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held very two seconds until the frequency en learned. The indicator lamp will flash en rapidly after several seconds upon
aining.
WWW.MANUALS
Rolling code programming:
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)
1. Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, reference to garage door opener operator’s manual.
2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit (which activated the “training light”).
Note:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate step 3.
3. Firmly printegrateand releathe trainmay requcomplete
4. Confirm programmcontrol tr
Canadian pr
During prograutomaticallyhold the inte(note steps 2while you prtransmitter esignal has beslowly and thsuccessful tr
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ga
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Operation of remote control: Erasing the remote control memory:
rn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 2.
ultaneously holding down the left and right side ttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the trol lamp blinks rapidly, will erase the codes of
three channels.
WWW.MANUA169rage door opener
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate the remote controlled device. The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
1. Tuor
2. Simbuconall
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
170Ski sack
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
p (3) in trunk up (a magnet will hold flap position).
s into ski sack.
k is designed for up to two pairs of skis. the ski sack with other objects.
en the ski sack securely. In an accident, ed ski sack can cause injury to vehicle
P91.10-2061.26
3
WWW.MANUALS
Ski sack (optional)
Unfolding and loading
1. Fold armrest (1) down.
2. Swing cover (2) down.
3. Pull ski sack into passenger compartment and unfold.
4. Swing flain its top
5. Slide ski
2
1
P91.10-2056-26
Warning!
The ski sacDo not load
Always fastan unfastenoccupants.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Sk
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
nnect snap hook (6) of front strap to eye (7) ated on center tunnel in front of rear seat bench.
6
7
WWW.MANUA171i sack
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
6. Wrap strap around ski sack and armrest (4).
7. Close clasp (arrow up) and pull strap (5) tight (arrow down) to immobilize skis.
8. Coloc
P91.10-2063-26
4
5
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
172Ski sack
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
flatten ski sack lengthwise.
ap with snap hook around ski sack.
the reinforced ski sack tip (8), then to roll up the ski sack tightly.
8
P91.10-2058-26
WWW.MANUALS
Unloading and folding
1. Loosen strap, open clasp by pressing tabs (arrows) together, and unload skis.
2. Close flap in trunk.
3. Disconnect snap hook from eye located on center tunnel in front of rear seat bench.
4. Fold and
5. Wrap str
6. Fold backcontinue
P91.10-2048-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Sk
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
ce folded ski sack inside recess of backrest.
P91.10-2057-26
WWW.MANUA173i sack
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
7. Place rear strap in fold of ski sack. 8. Pla
P91.10-2060-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
174Ski sack
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ki sack
of ski sack we recommend that you contact d Mercedes-Benz Center.
nauthorized persons from obtaining access always close the pass-through.
vehicle with trunk lid open while the emoved. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) nter vehicle interior resulting in sness and death.
WWW.MANUALS
9. Close ski sack compartment cover.
Removal of s
For removal an authorize
Note:
To prevent uto the trunk,
P91.10-2059-26
Warning!
Never driveski sack is rgases may eunconsciou
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS 175Contents – Driving
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Driving
Control and operation of radio transmitters ………………… 176
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) …………………………… 177
Maintenance ……………………………..177Catalytic converter …………………… 178Emission control ……………………….179Tele Aid ……………………………………. 180Steering lock …………………………….. 190Starting and turning off
the engine ……………………………. 192Automatic transmission …………… 193Parking brake ……………………………202
Driving instructions …………………. 203Drive sensibly – save fuel …….. 203Drinking and driving ……………. 203Pedals …………………………………… 203Power assistance …………………… 204Brakes …………………………………… 204Driving off …………………………….. 205Parking …………………………………. 205Tires ……………………………………… 206Snow chains …………………………. 209Winter driving instructions ………………………….. 209Deep water ……………………………..210Passenger compartment …………211Traveling abroad …………………….211
Cruise control …………………………… 212Brake assist system
(BAS) ……………………………………. 215Antilock brake system
(ABS) ……………………………………. 217Electronic stability program
(ESP) ……………………………………. 219What you should know
at the gas station …………………..223Check regularly and
before a long trip ………………….225
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
176Control and operation of radio transmitters
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
and two-way radio
itters, such as a portable telephone or a unit should only be used inside the y are connected to an antenna that is he outside of the vehicle.
adio transmitter operation instructions e of an external antenna.
te radio transmitters equipped with a ttached antenna (i.e. without being o an external antenna) from inside the le the engine is running. Doing so could lfunction of the vehicle’s electronic sibly resulting in an accident and jury.
WWW.MANUALS
Control and operation of radio transmitters
COMAND, radio and telephone
1 Observe all legal requirements.
Telephones
Radio transmcitizens bandvehicle if theinstalled on t
Refer to the rregarding us
Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Warning!
Never operabuilt-in or aconnected tvehicle whilead to a masystem, pospersonal in
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Th
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) Maintenance
ximately 30 days or 2 000 miles ( 2000 km) prior next recommended service, the remaining ce or days are displayed in the multifunction tor. See Flexible service system (FSS) on page 111.
ongly recommend that you have your vehicle d by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in ance with the Service Booklet at the times called the FSS.
to have the vehicle maintained in accordance e Service Booklet at the designated times/e may result in vehicle damage not covered by rcedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
regularly and before a long trip, see page 225.
WWW.MANUA177e first 1 000 miles
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds.
Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear. We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1” only at moderate speeds (for hill driving).
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually increased to the permissible maximum.
Approto the distanindica
We strserviceaccordfor by
Failurewith thmileagthe Me
Check
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
178Catalytic converter
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
amage to the catalytic converters, use only leaded gasoline in this vehicle.
le irregularities in engine operation should romptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned
ch the catalytic converter causing it to ich could start a fire.
vehicle, do not idle, park or operate in areas where combustible materials ss, hay or leaves can come into contact t exhaust system, as these materials ited and cause a vehicle fire.
WWW.MANUALS
Catalytic converter
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.
Caution!
To prevent dpremium un
Any noticeabbe repaired pfuel may reaoverheat, wh
Warning!
As with anythis vehiclesuch as grawith the hocould be ign
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ca
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Emission control Warning!
ation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your . All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, haling it can cause unconsciousness and
o death.
t run the engine in confined areas (such as a e) which are not properly ventilated. If you that exhaust gas fumes are entering the le while driving, have the cause determined orrected immediately. If you must drive under conditions, drive only with at least one w fully open.
WWW.MANUA179talytic converter
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law.
These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz authorized center technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Inhalhealthand inlead t
Do nogaragthinkvehicand cthesewindo
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
180Tele Aid
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted he volume control on the multifunction el, for raising press button æ and for ss button ç.
ress the “SOS” button, the Roadside utton • or the Information button ¡,
the type of response required.
the completion of your Acquaintance Call, ive a user ID and password via first call ting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele ly), you will have access to account remote door unlock, Info Services* profile
ilable only with COMAND
check
r turning the electronic key in starter ition 2, malfunctions are detected and e indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the istance button • and the Information stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not e message “TELE AID – VISIT ” appears for approx. 10 seconds in the n display.
WWW.MANUALS
Tele Aid
Important!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If the system is not activated the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays on after turning electronic key in starter switch to position 2 and the message “TELE AID – NOT ACTIVATED” will be shown in the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker when using tsteering whelowering pre
To activate, pAssistance bdepending on
Shortly afteryou will recemail. By visiAid” (USA oninformation, and more.
* Optional – ava
System self-
Initially, afteswitch to posindicated (thRoadside Assbutton ¡ come on). ThWORKSHOPmultifunctio
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Important! Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The
ge “EMERGENCY CALL – CONNECTING CALL” s in the multifunction display. When the tion is established, the message “EMERGENCY CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
unction display. All information relevant to the ency, such as the location of the vehicle
ined by the GPS satellite location system), model, identification number and color are ted.
e connection between the Response Center and cupants of the vehicle will be established atically soon after the emergency call has been d. When a voice connection is established the
system mutes and the message “TELE AID – GENCY CALL ACTIVE” appears in the unction display. The Response Center will attempt rmine more precisely the nature of the accident ed they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
WWW.MANUA181le Aid
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, in the “Roadside Assistance” button and in the “Information” button do not remain illuminated constantly in red and the message “TELE AID — VISIT WORKSHOP” is not displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
• following an accident in which the Emergency Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy,
• if the antitheft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, see pages 42 and 44.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror labeled “SOS”, then pressing the button (for longer than 2 seconds) located under the cover. See below for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.
messaappearconnecCALL –multifemerg(determvehiclegenera
A voicthe ocautominitiateaudio EMERmultifto deteprovid
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
182Tele Aid
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
tor lamp in the “SOS” button is continuously and there was no voice
to the Response Center established, le Aid system could not initiate an call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone not available). The message CY CALL – CALL FAILED” appears in nction display for approx. 10 seconds.
occur, assistance must be summoned ans.
WWW.MANUALS
The Tele Aid system is available if:
• it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services and cellular air time,
• the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the response center.
Note:
Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the response center.
Warning!
If the indicailluminatedconnectionthen the Teemergency network is “EMERGENthe multifu
Should thisby other me
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Initiating an emergency call manually Warning!
feel at any way in jeopardy when in the le (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in gerous road location), please do not wait for contact after you have pressed the emergency n. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a ocation. The Response Center will atically contact local emergency officials
the vehicle’s approximate location if they e an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make
contact with the vehicle occupants.
WWW.MANUA183le Aid
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open.
Press the SOS button (2) briefly (for longer than 2 seconds). The indicator lamp in the SOS button (2) will flash until the emergency call is concluded. Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is concluded.
P82.95-0209-20
If youvehica danvoicebuttosafe lautomwith receivvoice
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
184Tele Aid
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
as labor and/or towing charges may apply. oadside Assistance manual for more
ms are only available in the USA:
Drive services: Services such as jump start, lons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire vehicle spare tire are obtainable,
ehicle Diagnostics: This function permits edes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher ad malfunction codes and actual vehicle
lamp in the Roadside Assistance remains illuminated in red for approx. uring the system self-check after turning y in starter switch to position 2 (together S” button and the Information .
elf-check on page 180 when the indicator t light up in red or stays on longer than
ly 10 seconds.
WWW.MANUALS
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button •. Pressing and holding the button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID – ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE” appears in the multifunction display. The nature of the need for assistance can then be described. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. For
services suchRefer to the Rinformation.
These progra
• Sign anda few galwith the
• Remote Vthe Mercto downlodata.
Notes:
The indicatorbutton • 10 seconds delectronic kewith the “SObutton ¡)
See system slamp does noapproximate
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • is illuminated continuously and there was
A voice connection between the Client Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle
established. When a voice connection is shed the audio system mutes and the message AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE” appears in the unction display. Information regarding the ion of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is le to you.
re details concerning Tele Aid, please visit busa.com and use your ID and password, sent to
parately, to learn more (USA only).
dicator lamp in the Information button ¡ s illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds the system self-check after turning electronic starter switch to position 2 (together with the button and the Roadside Assistance button •).
stem self-check on page 180 when the indicator oes not light up in red or stays on longer than imately 10 seconds.
ndicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is ated continuously and there was no voice tion to the Response Center established, then the
WWW.MANUA185le Aid
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Information button ¡
Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to the Client Assistance Center. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message “INFO – CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message “INFO – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
will beestabli“TELEmultifoperatCenteravailab
For mowww.myou se
Notes:
The inremainduringkey in“SOS”
See sylamp dapprox
If the iilluminconnec
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
186Tele Aid
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
als
em processes calls using the following
c emergency – First priority
mergency – Second priority
assistance – Third priority
ion – Fourth priority
her priority call be initiated while you are n upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, opriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain uch as vehicle identification number or ation is not available, the operator may nsmit. During this time you will hear a ice contact will be interrupted. Voice esume once the retransmission is nce a call is concluded, a chirp will be e appropriate indicator lamp will stop COMAND system operation will resume s with COMAND).
WWW.MANUALS
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message “INFO – CALL FAILED” appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Important!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.
Upgrade Sign
Tele Aid systpriority.
• Automati
• Manual e
• Roadside
• Informat
Should a higconnected, aand the apprinformation sclient informneed to retrachirp and vocontact will rcompleted. Oheard and thflashing. The(only vehicle
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Important! When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio system or the COMAND system audio (only vehicles
OMAND) is muted and the selected mode (radio, CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
ed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and he call. The navigation system (if engaged) will ue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is le for use and spoken commands are only le by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND pop-up window will appear in the COMAND to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
WWW.MANUA187le Aid
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
Notes:
The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Client Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
with Ctape orinstallvehicleplace tcontinavailabavailabunit. Adisplay
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
188Tele Aid
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
oor unlock feature is available if the lar phone network is available.
on will flash and the message Y CALL – CALL CONNECTED” will appear unction display to indicate receipt of the command.
icle is unlocked, a Response Center l attempt to establish voice contact with the ants.
ock was pressed for more than 20 seconds nlock authorization was received by the nter, you must wait 15 minutes before k lock again.
WWW.MANUALS
Remote door unlock
In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and the reserve key is not handy, contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.
Then return to your vehicle and press trunk lock for minimum of 20 seconds until the “SOS” button is flashing. The message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call.
The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.
Notes:
The remote drelevant cellu
The SOS butt“EMERGENCin the multifdoor unlock
Once the vehspecialist wilvehicle occup
If the trunk lbefore door uResponse Cepressing trun
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Stolen vehicle tracking services Once information is available, the message “NEW INFO RECEIVED — READ LATER WHEN STOPPED?” will
. Select “Yes”. With the vehicle stopped in a safe n press SVC, then select “View Info Service of .yyyy hh.mm”. Messages will be retained for utes once the ignition is switched off.
tant!
id utilizes the cellular network for unication and the GPS (Global Positioning ) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these
s are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not n and if this occurs, assistance must be
oned by other means.
ing!
indicator lamp in the “SOS” button does not inate during or remains illuminated after the
self-check or if the message “TELE AID – WORKSHOP” appears in the multifunction y, have the system checked at the nearest des-Benz Center as soon as possible.
WWW.MANUA189le Aid
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident to the police who will issue a numbered incident report. Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center.
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to Law Enforcement.
Info Services (optional, except Canada)(only vehicles with COMAND)
Info Services categories include news, sports, stocks, weather and calendar reminders. Choices can be selected via www.mbusa.com or by calling 1-800-FOR-MERcedes.
To request Info Services press the SVC button on the COMAND system, then select “SEND NEW REQUEST FOR INFO SERVICE”. “NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST TRANSMITTED” will appear in the COMAND display and call status messages will appear in the multifunction display.
appearlocatiomm.dd30 min
Impor
Tele AcommSystemsignalfunctiosumm
Warn
If theillumsystemVISITdisplaMerce
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
190Steering lock
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
is unlocked.
ary, move steering wheel slightly to allow ronic key to be turned clockwise to 1.) Most electrical consumers can be . For detailed information see respective
osition.
position.
for starting and turning off the engine.
ng the vehicle always remove the ey from the steering lock, and lock the not leave children unattended in the
ith access to an unlocked vehicle. ed use of vehicle equipment may cause sonal injury.
WWW.MANUALS
Steering lock
0 The electronic key can be withdrawn in this position only. The steering is locked when the electronic key is removed from the steering lock. If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage. The electronic key can only be removed with the selector lever in position “P”. After removing the electronic key or with the electronic key in steering lock position 0, the selector lever is locked in position “P”.
1 Steering
(If necessthe electpositionoperatedsubjects.
2 Driving p
3 Starting
See page 192
P82.00-2073-26
Warning!
When leavielectronic kvehicle. Do vehicle, or wUnsupervisserious per
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ste
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Important! Notes:
ing sounds when the driver’s door is opened the electronic key is in steering lock position 1
he engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the tor (output) is limited.
erefore recommended that you turn off essary electrical consumers while driving in stop- traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of ttery.
essary strain on the battery and charging system minimized by turning off the following power ers, for example: Heated seats, rear window
ter. In addition, the automatic climate air volume l should be set to the lowest position.
ering lock can only be unlocked with the vehicle properly charged and connected.
WWW.MANUA191ering lock
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
If the electronic key is left in the steering lock position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the lock. In this case, remove electronic key from steering lock and reinsert.
Caution!
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the electronic key from the steering lock. Do not leave the electronic key in steering lock position 0.
A warnwhile or 0.
With talterna
It is thunnecand-gothe ba
Unnecmay beconsumdefroscontro
The stebattery
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
192Starting and turning off the engine
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
stalled starter non-repeat feature, the y must be turned completely to the left pting to start the engine again.
re temperatures frequently drop below -4°F commend that an engine block heater be r authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
n this subject.
tronic key in the steering lock to position 0 gine.
ic key can only be removed with the r in position “P”.
WWW.MANUALS
Starting and turning off the engine
Before starting
Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector lever is in position “P” or “N”. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
Starting
Do not depress accelerator.
Briefly turn electronic key in steering lock clockwise to the stop and release. The starter will engage until the engine is running.
If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops, turn electronic key completely to the left and repeat starting the engine.
After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Important!
Due to the inelectronic kebefore attem
In areas whe(-20°C) we reinstalled. Youadvise you o
Turning off
Turn the electo stop the en
The electronselector leve
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon
lector lever position
ogram mode selector
celerator position
hicle speed
ar shifting process is continuously adapted, dent on the driving style, the driving situation e road characteristics.
tant!
parking the vehicle or before working on the with the engine running, firmly depress the g brake pedal and shift the selector lever into “P”.
WWW.MANUA193tomatic transmission
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
• Se
• Pr
• Ac
• Ve
The gedepenand th
Impor
When vehicleparkin
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
194Automatic transmission
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
g any driving position from “N” or “P”, nt to allow the gear to fully engage before especially when the engine is cold.
position
le = early upshifting = normal acceleration
= later upshifting = rapid acceleration
epressing the accelerator beyond full wnshifting to a lower gear = maximum Once the desired speed is attained, ease up rator – the transmission shifts up again.
WWW.MANUALS
Driving
The selector lever is automatically locked while in position “P”. To move the selector lever out of position “P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release.
Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the service brake is applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the selector lever is in drive or reverse position.
Important!
After selectinwait a momeaccelerating,
Accelerator
Partial thrott
Full throttle
Kickdown (dthrottle) = doacceleration.on the accele
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Stopping Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to
n. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the ction indication.
ing!
g out of your vehicle with the selector lever lly engaged in position “P” is dangerous. when parked on an incline, position “P” alone ot prevent your vehicle from moving,
bly hitting people or objects.
s set the parking brake in addition to shifting ition “P”, see page 202 for parking brake.
parked on an incline, also turn front wheel st curb.
ing!
leaving the vehicle, always remove the onic key from the steering lock, and lock the le. Do not leave children unattended in the le, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. ren could move the gear selector lever from on “P”, which could result in an accident or s personal injury.
WWW.MANUA195tomatic transmission
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service brake.
For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N” or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake.
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids unnecessary transmission heat build up.
Maneuvering
To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never abruptly step on the accelerator.
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow), alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying slight partial throttle.
come omalfun
Warn
Gettinnot fuAlso, may npossi
Alwayto pos
Whenagain
Warn
WhenelectrvehicvehicChildpositiseriou
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
196Automatic transmission
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
osition
rk position is to be used when parking the . Engage only with the vehicle stopped. rk position is not intended to serve as a when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the should always use the parking brake in n to placing the selector lever in park to the vehicle.
ectronic key can only be removed from the g lock with the selector lever in n “P”. With the electronic key removed, the r lever is locked in position “P”.
malfunction in the vehicle’s electrical the selector lever could remain locked in n “P”. To unlock the selector lever lly, see page 274.
se gear
o reverse gear only with the vehicle d.
WWW.MANUALS
Selector lever position
The current selector lever position is indicated in the gear range indicator display. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever.
Park p
The pavehicleThe pabrake driver additiosecure
Notes:
The elsteerinpositioselecto
With asystempositiomanua
Rever
Shift tstoppe
10
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Dependent on the program mode selector switch position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the
Gear selection for special circumstances
nsmission gear ranges for special circumstances selected by pressing the selector lever to the r the left with the selector lever in position “D”.
ar range currently selected is indicated in the ent cluster display.
press selector lever in the ç direction:nsmission downshifts, one gear at a time, in the 4”, “3”, “2”, “1”.
and hold selector lever in the ç direction:lector lever position display will switch to the nge currently selected by the automatic ission.nsmission will only shift down one gear if the nge currently selected has already shifted to its t possible gear.
press selector lever in the æ direction:nsmission will shift from the current gear range
next higher gear range. If the transmission is y in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one possible.
WWW.MANUA197tomatic transmission
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
reverse gear is different. However, it is not possible to change the program mode while in reverse.
Neutral
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage “N” while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads, see winter driving instructions on page 209).
Important!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with selector lever in “N” can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
The tracan beright o
The geinstrum
BrieflyThe traorder “
Press The segear ratransmThe tragear rahighes
BrieflyThe trato the alreadgear is
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
198Automatic transmission
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
rief warm-up period this delayed upshift d engine noise might be perceived as a However, neither the engine nor are negatively affected by this mode of
upshift is effective with vehicle speeds h (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine below 95°F (35°C).
revving the engine when the selector lever lower gear range, the transmission will not er gear, if the engine’s revolutions per would be exceeded. In this case there will hift, even when the vehicle speed reaches RPM limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the s.
e engine from laboring at low RPM when ll gradients or with your vehicle heavily utomatic transmission will downshift when maintain engine RPM within the best .
WWW.MANUALS
Press and hold selector lever in the æ direction:The transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear range “D”.
Important!
With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”, upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperatures.
During the band increasemalfunction.transmissionoperation.
The delayed below 31 mptemperatures
To avoid overis moved to ashift to a lowminute limitbe no downsthe engine’s service brake
To prevent thdriving uphiloaded, the anecessary totorque range
Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Gear ranges: Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in mountainous regions or under extreme operating conditions. This gear selection will allow use of the engine’s braking power when descending steep grades.
Use this position, which makes maximum use of the engine’s braking effect, while descending very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).
WWW.MANUA199tomatic transmission
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for performance driving.
Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for moderately steep hills. Since the transmission does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear selection will allow use of the engine’s braking power downhill.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
200Automatic transmission
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
rator Operation: = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly to kickdown position) while driving uously, rather than depressing the rator pedal in the usual manner, will cause tomatic transmission to shift down into a ear. This gear shifting process is
dent on the current vehicle speed.
f = there will be no upshift when releasing elerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the ’s braking power during performance .
/Wet (snow and ice) mode
witch on symbol “W”. The vehicle starts 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st r with accelerator pedal in kick-down n.
” mode helps to improve traction and stability of the vehicle.
ar shifting process occurs at lower vehicle gine speeds than in the “S” program mode.
WWW.MANUALS
Program mode selector switch
The transmission is provided with a selector switch (1) for Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W” program modes.
S Standard mode
Press switch on symbol “S”. Use this mode for all regular driving.
The vehicle starts out in 1st gear.
AcceleFast on(not incontinaccelethe aulower gdepen
Fast ofthe accenginedriving
W Winter
Press sout in gear, opositio
The “Wdriving
The geand en
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Au
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Caution! In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be activated.
age 2nd gear or reverse:
p the vehicle.
ve selector lever to position “P”.
rn off the engine.
it approx. 10 seconds.
start the engine.
ve selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or ve selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear).
he transmission checked at your authorized des-Benz Center as soon as possible.
malfunction in the vehicle’s electrical system the r lever may be locked in position “P”. To unlock ector lever manually, see page 274.
WWW.MANUA201tomatic transmission
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Never change the program mode when the selector lever is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared.
Important!
Always be certain of the program mode selected since the vehicle driving characteristics change with the selection of the program mode.
Dependent on the program mode selector switch position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes.
Emergency operation (Limp home mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in Limp home mode which engages when there is a malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on.
To eng
1. Sto
2. Mo
3. Tu
4. Wa
5. Re
6. Momo
Have tMerce
With aselectothe sel
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
202Parking brake
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
rmly depress parking brake pedal. When c key is in steering lock position 2, the g lamp in the instrument cluster should htly.
e parking brake, pull handle on instrument ake warning lamp in the instrument d go out.
unds, if you start to drive without having parking brake.
e warning lamp on page 229.
ng the vehicle always remove the ey from the steering lock, and lock the not leave children unattended in the
ith access to an unlocked vehicle. uld release the parking brake, which t in an accident or serious injury.
WWW.MANUALS
Parking brake To engage, fithe electronibrake warnincome on brig
To release thpanel. The brcluster shoul
A warning soreleased the
Also see brak
Warning!
When leavielectronic kvehicle. Do vehicle, or wChildren cocould resul
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Driving instructions Drinking and driving
ing!
ing or taking drugs and driving can be a very rous combination. Even a small amount of
ol or drugs can affect your reflexes, ptions and judgement.
ossibility of a serious or even fatal accident is ly increased when you drink or take drugs rive.
e don’t drink or take drugs and drive or allow e to drive after drinking or taking drugs.
ing!
driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects in this area may impair pedal movement.
WWW.MANUA203iving instructions
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
• keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures,
• remove unnecessary loads,
• remove roof rack when not in use,
• allow engine to warm up under low load use,
• avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration,
• have all maintenance work performed at regular intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly country.
Pedals
Warn
Drinkdangealcohperce
The psharpand d
Pleasanyon
Warn
Keep stored
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
204Driving instructions
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
n of the parking brake system is checked e vehicle is in the shop for the required service.
g brake is released and the brake warning nstrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid eservoir is too low.
ar or a leak in the system may be the w brake fluid in the reservoir.
ke system inspected at an authorized nz Center immediately.
d service work on the brake system should t by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
rake pads and brake fluid recommended by nz.
n recommended brake pads are other than recommended brake fluid
braking properties of the vehicle can be an extent that safe braking is ly impaired. This could result in an
WWW.MANUALS
Power assistance
Brakes
The conditioeach time thmaintenance
If the parkinlamp in the ilevel in the r
Brake pad wereason for lo
Have the braMercedes-Be
All checks anbe carried ou
Install only bMercedes-Be
Warning!
When the engine is not running, the brake and steering systems are without power assistance. Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.
Warning!
After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Warning!
If other thainstalled, oris used, thedegraded tosubstantialaccident.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Caution! Parking
tant!
visable to set the parking brake whenever g or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move r lever to position “P”.
parking on hills, always set the parking brake.
ing!
uce the risk of personal injury as a result of le movement, before turning off the engine aving the vehicle, always:
eep right foot on the service brake pedal.
irmly depress parking brake pedal.
ove the selector lever to position “P”.
lowly release the service brake pedal.
urn front wheels towards the road curb.
urn the electronic key to steering lock osition 0 and remove.
ake the electronic key and lock vehicle when aving.
WWW.MANUA205iving instructions
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream will cool down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Impor
It is adparkinselecto
When
Warn
To redvehicand le
1. K
2. F
3. M
4. S
5. T
6. Tp
7. Tle
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
206Driving instructions
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
your tires to wear down too far. As approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the operties on a wet road are sharply
upon the weather and/or road surface ), the tire traction varies widely.
WWW.MANUALS
Tires
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs.
Warning!
Do not allowtread depthadhesion prreduced.
Depending (conditions
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high
Tire traction
fe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is lower than on a dry road.
ould pay particular attention to the condition of d whenever the outside temperatures are close to ezing point.
ommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter for all four wheels to insure normal balanced ng characteristics. On packed snow, they can your stopping distance as compared with er tires. Stopping distance, however, is still erably greater than when the road is not snow or ered.
ing!
has formed on the road, tire traction will be antially reduced. Under such weather tions, drive, steer and brake with extreme n.
WWW.MANUA207iving instructions
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Aquaplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.
The saalways
You shthe roathe fre
We recseasonhandlireducesummconsidice cov
Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warn
If ice substcondicautio
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
208Driving instructions
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ire rating, local speed limits should be prudent driving speeds appropriate to nditions.
permitted by law, never operate a peeds greater than the maximum speed e tires.
he maximum speed for which tires are ad to sudden tire failure causing loss of trol and resulting in personal injury e death.
WWW.MANUALS
Tire speed rating
CLK 430:Your vehicle is factory equipped with “W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).
CLK 55 AMG:Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Z”-rated tires, which are permissible for speeds over 148 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 156 mph (250 km/h).
Despite the tobeyed. Use prevailing co
Warning!
Even when vehicle at srating of th
Exceeding trated can levehicle conand possibl
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Snow chains Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary
uce the normal brake effect. We therefore mend depressing the brake pedal periodically traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can oad salt impaired braking efficiency back to l. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done t endangering other drivers on the road.
ehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as le after driving is resumed while observing the rules in the previous paragraph.
ing!
vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure now is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and around the vehicle with engine running. wise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness eath.
ure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a w slightly on the side of the vehicle not the wind.
WWW.MANUA209iving instructions
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow.
When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control switch to OFF, refer to page 221.
Use of snow chains is only permissible when winter tires are mounted, see technical data on page 303.
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move selector lever to position “N”. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
to prodrecomwhen bring rnormawithou
If the vroads,possibsafety
Warn
If thethat sfrom Otherenterand d
To asswindofacing
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
210Driving instructions
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ration, the maximum effectiveness of the e system (ABS) or of the electronic stability P) can only be achieved with M+S rated es and/or snow chains recommended by nz. Snow chains maximize performance.
nstructions with snow chains see page 209.
through flooded areas or water of unknown
rive through deep water, drive slowly to r from entering the engine compartment or mpartment, being ingested by the air bly causing damage to electrical or wiring, to engine or transmission that is y the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
WWW.MANUALS
Winter driving
Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter.
• Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil which is not approved for winter operation. For viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity, see page 305.
• Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration.
• Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures, see page 256.
• Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low ambient temperatures.
• Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on all four wheels for the winter season. Observe permissible maximum speed for M+S rated radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit.
In winter opeantilock brakprogram (ESradial-ply tirMercedes-Be
For driving i
Deep water
Caution!
Do not drive depth.
If you must dprevent watepassenger cointake, possicomponents not covered b
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Passenger compartment Traveling abroad
, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service k at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas
are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz directory, you should request pertinent ation from your authorized Mercedes-Benz .
WWW.MANUA211iving instructions
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
AbroadnetworwhichCenterinformCenter
Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
212Driving systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
te and set: briefly to set speed. r up to accelerate.
te and set:lever briefly to set speed. r down to decelerate.
the vehicle is accelerated to the desired th the accelerator.
set by briefly pushing the lever to 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be
d can be increased (e.g. for passing) by accelerator. After the accelerator is the previously set speed will be resumed cally.
eed is to be increased or decreased . g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in
1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or p the lever in the appropriate direction for or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h) ts. When the lever is released, the newly remains.
WWW.MANUALS
Cruise control
The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed manner, for example over long distances, as it automatically maintains the set speed by actively regulating the throttle setting.
Any given speed above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by operating the lever.
1 AcceleraLift leverHold leve
2 DeceleraDepress Hold leve
Normallyspeed wi
Speed is positionreleased.
The speeusing thereleased,automati
If a set spslightly, epositionbriefly tiincreasesincremenset speed
1
4
2
3
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
3 Canceling Important!
g gear selector lever to position “N” switches the control off.
ing!
use the cruise control if the traffic and er conditions make it advisable to travel at a
y speed.
he use of cruise control can be dangerous on inding roads or in heavy traffic because
onditions do not allow safe driving at a steady peed.
he use of cruise control can be dangerous on lippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion an result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Resume” function should only be operated if iver is fully aware of the previously set speed ishes to resume this particular preset speed.
WWW.MANUA213iving systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to position 3.
When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle speed drops below approx. 25 mph (40 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the cruise control will be canceled.
If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
4 Resume
If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when driving at a speed exceeding approx. 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise control. The last memorized speed is canceled when the electronic key in the steering lock is turned to position 1 or 0.
Movincruise
Warn
Only weathstead
• Twcs
• Tsc
The “the drand w
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
214Driving systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
, in some cases you may have to step on the o slow down. In this case the cruise control ff.
to resume the previously set speed.
WWW.MANUALS
Notes:
If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the automatic transmission shifts down (max. to 3rd gear) to maintain the set cruise control speed by using the engine’s braking power.
As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position.
Neverthelessbrake pedal tis switched o
Use the lever
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Brake assist system (BAS) The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers by
maximum power boost applied to the brakes uickly in emergency braking conditions than otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s g style. This can help reduce braking distances hat ordinary driving and braking style might do. S complements the antilock brake system (ABS).
ng the brakes very quickly results in maximum sistance.
ive the benefit of the system you must apply uous full braking power during the stopping ce. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.
he brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
alfunction indicator lamp for the electronic ty program (ESP) is combined with the BAS ction indicator lamp.
WWW.MANUA215iving systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
havingmore qmight brakinover wThe BA
ApplyiBAS as
To rececontinsequen
Once t
The mstabilimalfun
Warning!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
216Driving systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
g voltage falls below 10 volts, the indicator lamp comes on and the BAS is When the voltage is above this value again, ion indicator lamp should go out and the tional.
malfunctioning, the BAS is also switched function indicator lamps come on with the ng.
ing message is displayed, have the BAS or at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ssible.
WWW.MANUALS
The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in steering lock position 2 and should go out with the engine running.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on permanently while the engine is running, a malfunction has been detected in either system. As a result, it is possible that now only partial engine output will be available. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.
If the charginmalfunction switched off.the malfunctBAS is opera
With the ABSoff. Both malengine runni
If a BAS warnESP checkedas soon as po
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Antilock brake system (ABS) At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal,
ting that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep nd steady pressure on the brake pedal while encing the pulsation.
uous steady brake pedal pressure results in ng the advantages of the ABS, namely braking and ability to steer the vehicle.
case of an emergency brake maneuver keep uous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this r only can the ABS be most effective.
pery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even ght brake pedal pressure because of the sed likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating pedal can be an indication of hazardous road ions and functions as a reminder to take extra hile driving.
WWW.MANUA217iving systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Important!
The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers.
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.
indicafirm aexperi
Continapplyipower
In the continmanne
On slipwith liincreabrake conditcare w
Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm, steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
218Driving systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
alfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated, em checked at your authorized nz Center as soon as possible.
ing vehicles to slippery road conditions , operate your hazard warning flashers as
prevent the natural laws of physics on the vehicle, nor can it increase teering efficiency beyond that afforded ition of the vehicle brakes and tires or afforded. The ABS cannot prevent ncluding those resulting from excessive ns, following another vehicle too quaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and er can prevent accidents. The of an ABS equipped vehicle must never in a reckless or dangerous manner jeopardize the user’s safety or the ers.
WWW.MANUALS
ABS control
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp — in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in steering lock position 2 and should go out with the engine running.
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake system functions in the usual manner, but without antilock assistance.
For ABS malfunction indicator lamp, see page 231.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on with the engine running.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the ABS is operational.
If the ABS mhave the systMercedes-Be
Note:
To alert followyou discoverappropriate.
Warning!
ABS cannotfrom actingbraking or sby the condthe tractionaccidents, ispeed in turclosely, or askillful drivcapabilitiesbe exploitedwhich couldsafety of oth
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Electronic stability program (ESP) Important!
SP warning lamp v flashes:
ring take-off apply as little throttle as possible.
ile driving ease up on the accelerator.
apt your speed and driving to the prevailing road ditions.
not switch off the ESP.
n!
ehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see the vehicle on page 272), the engine must be ff (electronic key in steering lock position 0 or 1).
ise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and ply the rear wheel brakes.
WWW.MANUA219iving systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in operation.
If the E
• Du
• Wh
• Adcon
• Do
Cautio
If the vtowingshut oOtherwwill ap
Warning!
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
220Driving systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ehicle with varied size tires will cause the ate at different speeds, therefore the ESP (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer ). For this reason, all wheels, including the
must have the same tire outside diameter.
the parking brake on a brake test r, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise, immediately be engaged and will apply the rakes.
ration, the maximum effectiveness of the chieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended dial-ply tires and/or snow chains.
ng ESP
supply was interrupted (battery or empty), the BAS/ESP malfunction p may be illuminated with the engine
wheel completely to the left and then to e BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp t.
WWW.MANUALS
Notes:
The malfunction indicator lamp ¿ for the ESP is combined with that of the BAS.
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and the yellow ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer dial come on with the electronic key in steering lock position 2. They should go out with the engine running.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either system. Only partial engine output will be available.
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.
If the ESP warning message is displayed, have the BAS or ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
For ESP warning message, see page 244.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched off.
Driving the vwheels to rotmay activatedial comes onspare wheel,
When testingdynamometethe ESP will rear wheel b
In winter opeESP is only aM+S rated ra
Synchronizi
If the power disconnectedindicator lamrunning.
Turn steeringthe right. Thshould go ou
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Dr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
ESP control switch To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
off ESP by pressing the upper half of the ESP . The ESP warning lamp v, located in the meter dial, is continuously illuminated.
he ESP system switched off, the engine torque ion feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced stability offered by ESP is unavailable.
your speed and driving to the prevailing road ions.
ion of the ESP system remains active, even with itch in the OFF position.
drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the is applied until the wheel regains sufficient n. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds pproximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches off ph (80 km/h).
ing!
the ESP warning lamp is illuminated uously, the ESP is switched off.
t your speed and driving to the prevailing road tions.
WWW.MANUA221iving systems
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
ESP control switch located on center console.
To switch ESP off, press upper half of the switch.
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer dial, comes on.
To switch ESP on again, press lower half of the switch.
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer dial, goes out.
switchswitchspeedo
With treductvehicle
Adapt condit
A portthe sw
If one brake tractioup to aat 50 m
P54.25-2037-26
Warn
Whencontin
Adapcondi
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
222Driving systems
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ning lamp, located in the speedometer dial, at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires
and the wheels begin to spin.
he enhanced vehicle stability offered by wer half of the switch (the ESP warning peedometer dial goes out).
rning lamp flashes:
ke-off, apply as little throttle as possible,
ving, ease up on the accelerator.
WWW.MANUALS
Note:
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The ESP warstarts to flashlose traction
To return to tESP: press lolamp in the s
Important!
If the ESP wa
• during ta
• while dri
Warning!
ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in circumstances described above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Wh
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
What you should know at the gas station Open flap by pushing near front (arrow). Turn fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in
as been released, then remove cap. Failure to e slowly could result in personal injury.
l release of fuel filler flap, see page 287.
vent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully filler nozzle unit. Only fill fuel tank until the filler unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
g the engine running and the fuel cap open can the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate.
nk capacity approx. 16.4 US gal (62.0 l).cludes approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) reserve. Use m unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane Index 91
ge of 96 RON/86 MON).
ing!
illing of fuel tank may result in creating ure in the system which could cause a gas arge such as the gas spraying back out upon ing the filler nozzle which could cause
nal injury.
WWW.MANUA223at you should know at the gas station
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Fuel supply
tank hremov
Manua
Fuel
To preinsert nozzle
Leavincause
Fuel taThis inpremiu(Avera
Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Warn
Overfpressdischremovperso
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
224What you should know at the gas station
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
itioner
frigerant and special PAG lubricant, see .
low beams: H7 (55 W),: Xenon (optional)
s: H1 (55 W),al lamps,6 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp),nd standing lamps, front: H 6W (6 W),
ker lamps, front: 5 W/4 cp,al lamps, rear: 21 W/24 cp, parking and side marker lamps: 21/4 W,arking lamp: 5 W/4 cp,amp, driver’s side: 21 W/32 cp,mps: 21 W/32 cp,
late lamps: 5 W/4 cp.
WWW.MANUALS
• Engine oil
Engine oil level check, see page 114 and page 253.
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking level: 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service Products sheet.
• Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality).
For further information (e.g. anticorrosion/antifreeze), see page 305.
• Spark plugs
Approved spark plugs, see page 303.
• Tire pressure
For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside the fuel filler flap. See page 267 for further details.
• Air cond
R-134a repage 305
• Bulbs
High andlow beamfog lampturn signfront 115parking aside marturn signstop, tail,tail and prear fog lbackup lalicense p
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ch
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Check regularly and before a long trip 1 Engine oil levelSee “Engine oil level, checking” on page 114 and
ge 253.
olant levele “Coolant level” on page 254.
ake fluide “Brake fluid” on page 307.
ndshield washer systemadlamp cleaning systemr refilling reservoir see page 256.
g hood, see page 251.
e lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For ement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on 75.
r lamps switch, see page 116.
WWW.MANUA225eck regularly and before a long trip
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
pa
2 CoSe
3 BrSe
4 WiHeFo
Openin
Vehiclreplacpage 2
Exterio
Merce
des-Be
nz
Mercedes-Benz
42
1
3
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
WWW.MANUALS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS 227Contents – Instrument cluster display
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Instrument cluster display
Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ………………..228
On-board diagnostic system Check engine malfunction indicator lamp ………………………..228Brake warning lamp ………………229Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp ………………………..230Fuel reserve and fuel cap placement warning ………………..230Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp ……………231BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp ………………………..231
ABS malfunction indicator lamp ………………………. 231Telescoping steering column – indicator lamp ………………………. 232Seat belt warning lamp …………. 232
Malfunction and indicator lamps in the center console …………… 232
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ………………………. 232
Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display ………….. 233
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) …………….. 234DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) ………………….. 234BATTERY/ALTERNATOR ………. 235ABS-SYSTEM ………………………… 236BRAKE ASSIST ……………………… 236
BRAKE LINING WEAR …………..237BRAKE FLUID ………………………..237PARKING BRAKE …………………..238ENGINE FAN ………………………….238COOLANT (coolant level) ………………………..239COOLANT TEMP. (coolant temperature) …………….240LIGHTING SYSTEM ……………….. 241LIGHT SENSOR ………………………242STEER. WHEEL ADJUST. ………..242ENGINE OIL LEVEL ……………….243ELEC. STABIL. PROGRAM. (Electronic stability program) ………………………………..244REMOVE KEY ………………………..244WASHER FLUID …………………….245TELE AID ……………………………….246
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
228Malfunction and indicator lamps
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
erious damage can occur to the emission e contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz diately.
ial Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control itors emission control components that e input signals to or receive output signals trol module. Malfunctions resulting from or failure of any of these components are the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction p in the instrument cluster and are
sly stored in the SFI control module.
K ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp ve the system checked at your authorized nz Center as soon as possible.
xceptions, the control module switches off ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the using the lamp to come on, no longer exists consecutive cycles. See also page 230 for ement warning.
diagnostic connector is located in the mpartment near to the parking brake ng the accurate identification of system through the readout of diagnostic trouble
WWW.MANUALS
Malfunction and indicator lampsin the instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up during the bulb self-check when turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 2, have it checked and replaced if necessary.
On-board diagnostic systemCheck engine malfunction indicator lamp
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the engine is running,
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management system, emission control system, systems which impact emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we recommend that you have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuously and/or the vehicle is not driving normally (e.g. malfunction of the fuel management system or running
out of fuel), ssystem. PleasCenter imme
The Sequentmodule moneither providfrom the coninterruptionsindicated by indicator lamsimultaneou
If the “CHECcomes on, haMercedes-Be
With some ethe “CHECK condition, caduring threefuel cap plac
An on-board passenger copedal, allowimalfunctionscodes.
CHECKENGINE
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Brake warning lamp
find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid oir is reached, have the brake system checked for pad thickness and leaks.
Warning!
g with the brake warning lamp illuminated sult in an accident. Have your brake system ed immediately if the brake warning lamp on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be sly burned.
WWW.MANUA229lfunction and indicator lamps
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Except Canada
Canada only
When the brake warning lamp and message appear while the engine is running, this means:
• there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir (engine running and parking brake released), or
• the parking brake is set (engine running).
Note:
If you reservbrake
BRAKEDrivincan recheckstays brakecan repartsseriou
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
230Malfunction and indicator lamps
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
and fuel cap placement warning
rning lamp (1) comes on after starting the it comes on while driving, it indicates that is down to the reserve quantity of ly 2.1 gal (8 liters).
lamp blinks when the fuel cap is not uel system leak has been detected. p and see if lamp goes out after restart and fcheck.
g lamp continues to blink after closing the ectly, have the fuel system checked at your ercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
ngine running and the fuel cap open can e “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see
1
N54.30-2756-21
WWW.MANUALS
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp
The operational readiness of the airbag system is verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument cluster when
turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2. If no malfunction is detected, the lamp will go out after approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the components and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a malfunction by coming on again.
See page 67 for notes on airbags, see page 66 for belt tensioners and page 75 for infant and child seat restraint.
Fuel reserve
When the waengine, or if the fuel levelapproximate
The warningclosed, or a fRetighten canext OBD sel
If the warninfuel cap corrauthorized M
Leaving the ealso cause thpage 228.
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
SRS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp ABS malfunction indicator lamp
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in steering lock position 2 and
go out with the engine running.
the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and g in the instrument cluster remains illuminated
the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS tected a malfunction and has switched off. In this he brake system functions in the usual manner, thout antilock assistance.
he ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also ed off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on e engine running.
harging voltage falls below 10 volts, the ction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is
ed off. When the voltage is above this value again, lfunction indicator lamp should go out and the operational.
he system checked at your authorized des-Benz Center as soon as possible.
ge 217 for notes on the antilock brake system
WWW.MANUA231lfunction and indicator lamps
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The yellow ESP warning lamp in the speedometer dial comes on with the electronic key in steering lock position 2.
It should go out with engine running.
See page 219 if the warning lamp lights up or flashes when the vehicle is moving.
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with that of the BAS.
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in steering lock position 2. It should go out with the engine running.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp remains illuminated with the engine running, see page 215 for notes on the brake assist (BAS) and page 219 for notes on the electronic stability program (ESP).
should
When warninwhile has decase, tbut wi
With tswitchwith th
If the cmalfunswitchthe maABS is
Have tMerce
See pa(ABS).
BASESP
ABS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
232Malfunction and indicator lamps
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
and indicator lamps in the center
indicator lamp
icator lamp will light up for approx. en you turn the electronic key in steering
on 1 or 2.
icator lamp stays lit as long as a compatible child seat is properly installed assenger seat. It indicates that the front
rbag is switched off.
for BabySmartTM deactivation system.
a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
WWW.MANUALS
Telescoping steering column – indicator lamp
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in steering lock position 2 and should go out with the
engine running.
If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine, the adjustable steering column is not properly locked.
For locking the adjustable telescoping steering column, see page 78.
Seat belt warning lamp
With the electronic key in steering lock position 2, the seat belt warning lamp comes on and a warning sounds for approx.
6 seconds if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
Malfunctionconsole
AIRBAG OFF
The 7 ind6 seconds whlock to positi
The 7 indBabySmartTM
on the front ppassenger ai
See page 65
BabySmartTM is
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Malfunction and warning messages in the multifunction display
Notes:
n malfunction and warning messages are panied by an audible signal.ction and warning messages in red are always
panied by an audible signal.
rary messages such as “SWITCH OFF LIGHTS” t be stored in the malfunction message memory.
ing!
essages contain important information which d be taken note of and, where malfunction ated, addressed as soon as possible at an rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
e to repair condition noted may cause ge not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited nty, or result in property damage or personal .
WWW.MANUA233lfunction and warning messages
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Malfunction and warning messages for the following systems will be displayed immediately in the multifunction display.
These messages can be cleared from the instrument cluster by:
• using the J button on the instrument cluster, or
• pressing button j, k, è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel.
They are then stored in the malfunction message memory. See page 106.
CertaiaccomMalfunaccom
Tempowill no
Warn
All mshoulindicautho
FailurdamaWarrainjury
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
234Malfunction and warning messages
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
FECTIVE (several systems)
for several systems have failed. Some selves may also have failed.
Line 2
CTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!
WWW.MANUALS
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit)
This message is displayed to indicate that the information being relayed by the engine control unit is no longer complete. The coolant temperature gauge, tachometer, or the cruise control may have failed.
DISPLAY DE
The displayssystems them
Line 1 Line 2
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!
Line 1
DISPLAY DEFE
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR This message indicates a malfunction which must be repaired immediately.
indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should ndition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
may result in damage to the engine.
continue to drive the vehicle with this message ed.
so could result in serious engine damage that is ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
WWW.MANUA235lfunction and warning messages
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
It maythis cobeforeenginewhich
Do notdisplay
Doing not cov
Line 1 Line 2
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR VISIT WORKSHOP!
OVERVOLTAGE VISIT WORKSHOP!
UNDERVOLTAGE CONSUMER DEFECTIVE!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
236Malfunction and warning messages
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
IST
n has been detected in the system. The functions in the usual manner, but .
Line 2
VISIT WORKSHOP!
CTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!
WWW.MANUALS
ABS-SYSTEM
A malfunction has been detected in the system. The brake system functions in the usual manner, but without antilock assistance.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off.
Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE ASS
A malfunctiobrake systemwithout BAS
Line 1 Line 2
ABS-SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP!
P54.30-2938-21
Line 1
BRAKE ASSIST
DISPLAY DEFE
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
BRAKE LINING WEAR BRAKE FLUID
Line 2
FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP!
ing!
g with this message displayed can result in cident. Have your brake system checked diately. Don’t add brake fluid before checking ake system. Overfilling the brake fluid
voir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot e parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You e seriously burned.
WWW.MANUA237lfunction and warning messages
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
When this message appears during braking, it indicates that the brake pads are worn down.
Have the brake system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Line 1 Line 2
BRAKE LINING WEAR VISIT WORKSHOP!
Line 1
BRAKE
Warn
Drivinan acimmethe brreserengincan b
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
238Malfunction and warning messages
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
fan for the coolant is faulty. Observe coolant gauge while driving, see page 88.
Line 2
VISIT WORKSHOP!1
WWW.MANUALS
PARKING BRAKE
Parking brake, see page 202.
ENGINE FAN
1 The cooling temperature
Line 1 Line 2
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE!
Line 1
ENGINE FAN
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
COOLANT (coolant level) The low engine coolant level warning should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed
use serious engine damage not covered by the des-Benz Limited Warranty.
s of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have oling system checked at your authorized des-Benz Center as soon as possible.
drive without coolant in the cooling system. The will overheat causing major engine damage.
r the coolant temperature gauge while driving.
ge 255 for instructions on adding coolant.
ing!
t spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. reeze contains ethylene glycol which may if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. an be seriously burned.
WWW.MANUA239lfunction and warning messages
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
When this message appears while driving, the coolant level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks are noticeable and the engine temperature does not increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station and have coolant added to the coolant system.
may caMerce
In casethe coMerce
Notes:
Do notengine
Monito
See pa
Line 1 Line 2
COOLANT CHECK LEVEL!
Warn
Do noAntifburn You c
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
240Malfunction and warning messages
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
e operating conditions and stop-and-go city olant temperature may rise close to the red
hould not be operated with the coolant in the red zone. Doing so may cause e damage which is not covered by the
nz Limited Warranty.
en your engine is badly overheated can fluids which may have leaked into the partment to catch fire. You could be rned.
an overheated engine can cause serious an occur just by opening the engine way from the engine if you see or hear
ng from it.
engine, get out of the vehicle and do ear the vehicle until it cools down.
WWW.MANUALS
COOLANT TEMP. (coolant temperature)
1 Observe coolant temperature gauge, see page 88. Check coolant level, see page 254.
This may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
During severtraffic, the comarking.
The engine stemperature serious enginMercedes-Be
Line 1 Line 2
COOLANT TEMP. VISIT WORKSHOP!1
Warning!
Driving whcause someengine comseriously bu
Steam fromburns and chood. Stay asteam comi
Turn off thenot stand n
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
LIGHTING SYSTEM When the message appears after starting the engine, or if it comes on while driving, this indicates a failure in
rking lamp, taillamp, stop lamp, or low beam mp. See page 275 for instructions on replacing
xterior lamp fails, the message will appear only that lamp is switched on.
ke lamp fails, the message will appear when ng the brake and stays on until the engine is off.
tional lighting is installed (e.g. auxiliary mps etc.) be certain to connect into the fuse the failure indicator monitoring unit order to amaging the system.
WWW.MANUA241lfunction and warning messages
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
the paheadlabulbs.
If an ewhen
If a braapplyiturned
Note:
If addiheadlabeforeavoid d
Line 1 Line 2
LAMP DEFECTIVE CHECK LAMPS!
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
242Malfunction and warning messages
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
EEL ADJUST.
he adjustable telescoping steering column,
Line 2
STEER. WHEEL ADJUST.
WWW.MANUALS
LIGHT SENSOR
With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds and the message “SWITCH OFF LIGHTS!” appears in the multifunction indicator if the vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing lamps) are not switched off.
STEER. WH
For locking tsee page 78.
Line 1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
ENGINE OIL LEVEL 3 There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See engine oil level
ator on page 114.
engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. k the engine oil level immediately. See engine oil level ator on page 114 and check the engine for visible leakage (loss
l).
measuring system is malfunctioning.
y be that there is water in the engine oil. Have the engine oil ked.
the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL” ge appears while the engine is running and at ing temperature, the engine oil level has dropped roximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.
this occurs, the warning will first come on ittently and then stay on if the oil level drops r.
il leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest station where the engine oil should be topped to ll” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.
gine oil level warnings should not be ignored. ed driving with the symbol displayed could in serious engine damage that is not covered by rcedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
WWW.MANUA243lfunction and warning messages
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See engine oil level indicator on page 114
2 There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.
indic
4 The Checindicof oi
5 The
6 It machec
When messaoperatto app
When intermfurthe
If no oservicethe “fu
The enExtendresult the Me
Line 1 Line 2
ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK LEVEL!1
ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP, ENGINE OFF!2
ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL!3
ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP!4
ENGINE OIL SENSOR VISIT WORKSHOP!5
ENGINE OIL VISIT WORKSHOP!6
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
244Malfunction and warning messages
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Y
e plus an audible alarm indicate that the y is in steering lock position 0 or 1, and the is open.
Line 2
REMOVE KEY!
P54.30-3573-21
WWW.MANUALS
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.(Electronic stability program)
1 A malfunction has been detected in the system. Pressing the accelerator pedal will require greater effort. Only partial engine output will be available.
2 This message may be displayed if the power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or empty).
3 Synchronize ESP. See page 220
REMOVE KE
This messagelectronic kedriver’s door
Line 1 Line 2
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP!
ELEC. STABIL. PROG. VISIT WORKSHOP!1, 2, 3
Line 1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
WASHER FLUID When this message appears while the engine is running, the level of the reservoir has dropped to
. 1/3 of the total volume. The reservoir should be with the prescribed mixture of MB Windshield r Concentrate “S” and water or the Concentrate mmercially available premixed windshield r solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient rature, at the next opportunity. The reservoir for ndshield and headlamp washer systems is located engine compartment.
ndshield washer system on page 256 for tions on adding washer fluid.
WWW.MANUA245lfunction and warning messages
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
approxrefilledWasheand cowashetempethe wiin the
See wiinstruc
Line 1 Line 2
WASHER FLUID CHECK LEVEL!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
246Malfunction and warning messages
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
WWW.MANUALS
TELE AID
1 When this message appears, a malfunction has been detected in the Tele Aid system. In some cases it may not be possible to initiate an Emergency, Roadside Assistance or Information call.
See page 180 for notes on the Tele Aid.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Line 1 Line 2
TELE AID VISIT WORKSHOP!1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS 247Contents – Practical hints
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Practical hints
First aid kit ……………………………….248Shelf below rear window …………..248Stowing things in
the vehicle …………………………….248Fuses …………………………………………249Hood ………………………………………….251Checking engine oil level ………….253Automatic transmission
fluid level ……………………………..254Coolant level ……………………………..254
Adding coolant ………………………255Windshield washer / headlamp
cleaning system …………………….256Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio …………………..256
Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment …………… 257
Vehicle jack ……………………………… 258Wheels …………………………………….. 259
Tire replacement ………………….. 259Rotating wheels ……………………. 260
Spare wheel ……………………………… 261Changing wheels ……………………… 262Tire inflation pressure …………….. 267Battery ……………………………………… 268Jump starting …………………………… 270Towing the vehicle …………………… 272
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ……………….274
Exterior lamps …………………………. 275Headlamp assembly ……………….276Taillamp assemblies ……………… 278
Adjusting headlamp aim ……………280Changing batteries in the
electronic main key ………………283Synchronizing remote control ……………………….285
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof ……………….286
Manual release for fuel filler flap ………………………..287
Replacing wiper blade insert …………………………………….287
Trunk lamp ……………………………….289Roof rack …………………………………..289
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
248First aid kit
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
rear window
gs in the vehicle
low the rear window should not be y objects. This will avoid such objects thrown about and injuring vehicle uring an accident or sudden maneuver.
s the preferred place to carry objects.
id personal injury during a collision or euver, exercise care when stowing
luggage or cargo in the trunk if not pile luggage or cargo higher than ks. Do not place anything on the shelf
ear window.
WWW.MANUALS
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the shelf below the rear window. Pull handle (1) to open the lid.
Shelf below
Stowing thin
P86.30-2003-26
1
Warning!
The shelf beused to carrfrom being occupants d
The trunk i
Warning!
To help avosudden manthings. Put possible. Dothe seat bacbelow the r
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Fu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Fuses Fuse box in engine compartment
in fuse box in engine compartment
gain access to the main fuse box (1), press clamp row), lift the fuse box cover up and remove it.
close the main fuse box, engage back end of cover d let front end snap into place.
1
WWW.MANUA249ses
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Before replacing a blown fuse, determine the cause of the short circuit.
Spare fuses are supplied inside the main fuse box (1). Observe amperage and color of fuse.
A special fuse puller is supplied with the vehicle tools.
Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse.
A fuse chart can be found inside the corresponding fuse box cover.
1 Ma
To(ar
Toan
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
250Fuses
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
se box in the dashboard
fuse box to left of exterior lamp switch
ccess, open door, pry off cover (3) and
P
WWW.MANUALS
Auxiliary fuse box below the trunk floor
2 Auxiliary fuse box below the trunk floor.
To gain access, lift trunk floor.
Auxiliary fu
3 Auxiliary
To gain aremove.
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS En
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Hood The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is
rous to touch any components (ignition coils, plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the on system
ith the engine running,
hile starting the engine,
ignition is “on” and the engine is turned anually.
see flames, steam or smoke coming from the e compartment, or if the coolant temperature indicates that the engine is overheated, do en the hood. Move away from vehicle and do en the hood until the engine has cooled. If
sary, call a fire department.
WWW.MANUA251gine compartment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan blades.
dangesparkigniti
• w
• w
• ifm
If youengingaugenot opnot opneces
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
252Engine compartment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
2) to its stop out of radiator grill and open pull up on handle).
nd let it drop into lock from a height of (30 cm), assisting with hands placed flat on d (3).
damage, please make sure that hood is If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not n hood to attempt to fully close it.
2
3
WWW.MANUALS
To open:
To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the driver’s side of the instrument panel. At the same time a handle will extend out of the radiator grill (it may be necessary to lift the hood up slightly).
Caution!
To avoid damage to the windshield wiper or hood, open the hood only with wiper in the parked position.
Pull handle (hood (do not
To close:
Lower hood aapprox. 1 ft. edges of hoo
To avoid hoodfully closed. push down o
P88.40-2025-26
1
3
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS En
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Checking engine oil level Wipe oil dipstick clean prior to checking the engine oil level. Fully insert dipstick in tube, and remove after
econds to obtain accurate reading.
Oil level must be between the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of the dipstick.
antity between upper and lower dipstick marking approximately 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be drained oned. It could cause damage to engine and ic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz d Warranty.
alfunction and warning messages on page 233 if ine oil level display appears on the multifunction when the engine is running.
ge 114 for engine oil level indicator.
WWW.MANUA253gine compartment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Oil dipstick
2 Oil filler cap
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan.
three s
Fill qulevel is
Do notor siphcatalytLimite
See man engdisplay
Note:
See pa
Merce
des-Be
nz
Mercedes-Benz
2
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
254Engine compartment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
l
coolant level, the vehicle must be parked nd and the engine stopped.
t level only when coolant is cold.
evel should reach the black top part of the
P20.30-2032-26
WWW.MANUALS
Automatic transmission fluid level
The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic transmission fluid.
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmission fluid level.
Coolant leve
To check theon level grou
Check coolan
The coolant lreservoir.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS En
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Adding coolant • Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F
0°C). Allow engine to cool down before moving cap. The coolant reservoir contains
ot fluid and is under pressure.
sing a rag, slowly open cap approximately /2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened
mediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will e blown out under pressure.
o not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. ntifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may urn if it comes into contact with hot engine arts.
WWW.MANUA255gine compartment
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added.
The drain plugs for the cooling system are located on the right side of the engine block and at the bottom of the radiator.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixture, see page 310.
Warning!
In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury:
• Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
(9reh
• U1imb
• DAbp
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
256Engine compartment
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
and headlamp washer ratio
ures above freezing:
eld Washer Concentrate “S” and water.
100 parts water 1 gallon water).
ure below freezing:
eld Washer Concentrate “S” and available premixed windshield washer
reeze.
100 parts solvent 1 gallon solvent).
ent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do sher solvent/antifreeze on hot engine se it may burn. You can be seriously
WWW.MANUALS
Windshield washer/headlamp cleaning system
1 Windshield washer/headlamp cleaning system fluid reservoir
Capacity approx. 7.4 US qt (7.0 l).
The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield washer concentrate and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Windshield fluid mixing
For temperat
MB Windshi
1 part “S” to (40 ml “S” to
For temperat
MB Windshicommerciallysolvent/antif
1 part “S” to (40 ml “S” to
1
P82.35-2017-26
Warning!
Washer solvnot spill waparts, becauburned.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Sp
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment Lift trunk floor and engage handle in upper edge of the trunk.
ove spare tire:
uggage bowl counterclockwise and remove.
e spare tire:
pare tire in wheel well and secure it with luggage urn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop.
s lower trunk floor before closing trunk lid.
WWW.MANUA257are wheel, vehicle jack
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Trunk floor
2 Handle
3 Luggage bowl
4 Vehicle tools
To rem
Turn l
To stor
Place sbowl. T
Note:
Alway
P68.00-2253-26
2
1
34
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
258Spare wheel, vehicle jack
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
g the jack on the felt in the spare wheel arm must be lowered almost to the base of
designed exclusively for jacking up the e jack tubes built into either side of the
help avoid personal injury, use the jack he vehicle during a wheel change. eneath the vehicle while it is supported Keep hands and feet away from the area fted vehicle. Always firmly set parking lock wheels before raising vehicle with
gage parking brake while the vehicle is ertain that the jack is always vertical e, especially on hills. Always try to use level surface. Be sure that the jack arm rted in the jack tube. Always lower the sufficient capacity jackstands before der the vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS
Vehicle jack
1 Jack arm
2 Jack base
See illustration for proper storage of jack.
Before storinwell, the jackthe jack.
1
2
P40.10-2027-26
Warning!
The jack is vehicle at thvehicle. To only to lift tNever get bby the jack.under the librake and bjack.
Do not disenraised. Be cwhen in usthe jack on is fully insevehicle ontoworking un
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Tir
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Wheels It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be fastened to a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm)
ver wheels are mounted.
and tire specifications, refer to “Technical Data”.
ing!
, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread ly worn, or if the tires have sustained ge, replace them.
replacing rims, use only genuine des-Benz wheel bolts specified for the ular rim type. Failure to do so can result in lts loosening and possibly an accident.
WWW.MANUA259es, Wheels
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Tire replacement
Front tires should be replaced in sets. Rims and tires must be of the correct size and type. For dimensions, see “Technical Data”.
We recommend that you break in new tires for approx. 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed.
whene
For rim
Warn
Wornis baddama
WhenMerceparticthe bo
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
260Tires, Wheels
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
lean the inner side of the wheels any time e wheels or wash the vehicle underside.
tread tires is not recommended. Retread ersely affect the handling characteristics
the vehicle.
nt rims can cause tire pressure loss and e tire beads. For this reason, check rims for gular intervals. The rim flanges must be ear before a tire is mounted. Remove
sure proper tire inflation pressure after heels. For tire inflation pressure see
filler flap and also page 267.
WWW.MANUALS
Rotating wheels
Wheel rotation applies only when winter tires are mounted on all four wheels.
The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel.
Rotating, however, should be carried out as recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate.
Important!
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward movement.
Notes:
Thoroughly cyou rotate th
The use of retires may advand safety of
Dented or bedamage to thdamage at rechecked for wburrs, if any.
Check and enrotating the winside of fuel
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Tir
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Spare wheel Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward
ent.
and tire specifications, refer to “Technical Data”.
ing!
pare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use er a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) egate of all uses) may cause wheel rim failure g to an accident and possible injuries.
imensions of the spare wheel are different those of the road wheels of the rear axle. As a t, the vehicle handling characteristics change driving with a spare wheel mounted on the xle.
pare wheel should only be used temporarily, eplaced with a regular road wheel as quick as ble.
WWW.MANUA261es, Wheels
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Important!
The spare wheel rim size is 71/2 J x 17 H 2.
The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full size tire of the same type as on the vehicle’s front axle, and is fully functional. However, that spare wheel rim is weight optimized and has a limited service life of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) use before a standard wheel rim must replace it.
In the case of a rear axle flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel, when observing the following restrictions:
• Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.
• Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted.
If the arrow on tire side wall does not point in direction of vehicle forward movement when using the spare wheel, observe the following restriction:
movem
For rim
Warn
The sfor ov(aggrleadin
The dfrom resulwhenrear a
The sand rpossi
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
262Tires, Wheels
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
to a level area which is a safe distance dway.
ng brake and turn on hazard warning
ector lever to position “P” and turn off
ehicle from rolling away by blocking ith wheel chocks (not supplied with r sizable wood block or stone. When a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the side blocking both wheels of the other a level road, place one chock in front of and nd the wheel that is diagonally opposite to l being changed.
WWW.MANUALS
Changing wheels Move vehiclefrom the roa
1. Set parkiflasher.
2. Move selengine.
3. Prevent vwheels wvehicle) ochangingdownhillaxle. On one behithe whee
Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Tir
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
move the protective cover from the jack support e opening by inserting the screwdriver (supplied
the tool kit) in the opening and prying it out.
e tube openings are located directly behind the nt wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel usings.
WWW.MANUA263es, Wheels
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
4. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts.
5. Retubin
Thfroho
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
264Tires, Wheels
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
upper-most wheel bolt and install t bolt (1) supplied in the tool kit. Remove ining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected and sand.
heel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep m beneath the wheels.
1
WWW.MANUALS
6. Insert jack arm fully into the tube hole up to the stop. Place jack on firm ground. Position the jack so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the side (see arrow), even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.
7. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.
8. Unscrewalignmenthe remafrom dirt
9. Remove whands fro
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Tir
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
wer vehicle. Remove jack and insert jack tube er.
ing the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly, lowing the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are ht.serve a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
fore storing the jack, the jack arm must be ered almost to the base of the jack. For proper rage of vehicle jack see page 258.
sure proper tire pressure.
WWW.MANUA265es, Wheels
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
10. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. Install spare wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
Unscrew the alignment bolt (1) to install the last wheel bolt.
11. Locov
12. UsfoltigOb
Belowsto
13. En
11
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
266Tires, Wheels
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
heel rim is for temporary use only. Use tal of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) f all uses) may cause wheel rim failure n accident and possible injuries.
ions of the spare wheel are different of the road wheels of the rear axle. As a ehicle handling characteristics change g with a spare wheel mounted on the
heel should only be used temporarily, d with a regular road wheel as quick as
WWW.MANUALS
Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately.
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct mounting bolts.
Warning!
The spare wfor over a to(aggregate oleading to a
The dimensfrom those result, the vwhen drivinrear axle.
The spare wand replacepossible.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Tir
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Tire inflation pressure Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation
res for heavy loads produce favorable handling teristics with lighter loads and are perfectly sible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will e somewhat harder.
mperature and pressure increase with the vehicle Tire pressure should therefore only be checked rrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in tires only if pressure has dropped below the re listed in the table and the respective operating ions are taken into consideration.
derinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a the tire) may cause damage such as tread tion, bulging etc.. Regular tire pressure checks ing the spare tire) at intervals of no more than
s are therefore essential.
WWW.MANUA267es, Wheels
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended tires as well as for the varying operating conditions.
Important!
Tire pressure changes by approx. 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage – especially in the winter.
Example:
If garage temperature = approx. +68°F (+20°C) and ambient temperature = approx. +32°F (0°C) then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure +3 psi (+0.2 bar).
pressucharacpermisbecom
Tire tespeed.and cowarm pressucondit
An unnail insepara(includ14 day
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
268Battery
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
cement information:
ance-free battery is located in the trunk nk floor.
ife of the battery is dependent on its charge. The battery should always be kept harged, in order to last an optimum length
llow these instructions can result in y or death.
over batteries while connecting, you jured.
d contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow come in contact with eyes, skin or case it does, immediately flush affected ater and seek medical help if necessary.
ill also produce hydrogen gas, which is and explosive. Keep flames or sparks attery, avoid improper connection of
les, smoking etc..
WWW.MANUALS
If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for damage.
The spare tire should be checked periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary.
Battery
Important!
Battery repla
The maintenunder the tru
The service lcondition of sufficiently cof time.
Warning!
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.. Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Warning!
Failure to fosevere injur
Never lean might get in
Battery fluithis fluid toclothing. Inarea with w
A battery wflammable away from bjumper cab
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ba
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if
Note:
econnecting the battery also set the clock (see 08), resynchronize the front seats (see page 49), eat head restraints (see page 49), the express of the power windows (see page 148), the /pop-up roof (see page 150) and the electronic
ty program (ESP) (see page 220).
y recycling
ies contain material that can harm the nment with improper disposal.
12 Volt storage batteries contain lead.
ing of batteries is the preferred method of al.
states require sellers of batteries to accept old es for recycling.
WWW.MANUA269ttery
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month, mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for long periods of time.
Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s electrical circuit.
Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and connect last.
When removing and connecting the battery, always make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the electronic key is in steering lock position 0. The battery and its filler caps must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. During removal and installation always protect the disconnected battery positive (+) terminal with the cover attached to the battery.
While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the generator and other electronic components would be damaged.
After rpage 1front sfeatureslidingstabili
Batter
Batterenviro
Large
Recycldispos
Many batteri
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
270Jump starting
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
battery can freeze at approx. +14°F at case, it must be thawed out before
s are used. Attempting to jump start a y can result in it exploding, causing ry.
specifications:
cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or approx.
length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m).
is discharged, the engine should be started cables and the (12 V) battery of another
V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump more powerful battery could damage the trical systems, which will not be covered des-Benz Limited Warranty.
s located in the trunk under the trunk floor.
WWW.MANUALS
Jump starting Important!
A discharged(–10°C). In thjumper cablefrozen batterpersonal inju
Jumper cable
• Minimum2 AWG
• Maximum
If the batterywith jumper vehicle.
Only use 12starting withvehicle’s elecby the Merce
The battery i
Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc..
Read all instructions before proceeding.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Jum
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Proceed as follows: Important!
rt engine of the vehicle with the charged battery d run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move en the engine is started. Allow the discharged
ttery to charge for a few minutes. Start engine of disabled vehicle in the usual manner.
ter the engine has started, remove jumper cables exactly reversing the above installation uence, starting with the last connection made
st. When removing each clamp, make sure that it es not touch any other metal while the other end still attached.
ne does not run after several unsuccessful g attempts, have it checked at the nearest ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic ter.
WWW.MANUA271p starting
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that the jumper cables will reach, but never let the vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation.
2. On both vehicles:
• Turn off engine and all lights and accessories, except hazard warning flashers or work lights.
• Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to position “P”.
Important!
3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) under hood terminal of the discharged battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal parts.
4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged battery and the final connection to the negative (–) terminal (2) of the discharged battery.
5. Staanonwhbathe
6. Afbyseqfirdois
Notes:
If engistartinauthor
Excessconver
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
272Towing
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ing eye is located at the right, below the front towing eye is located on the de behind the grille in the bumper panel.
al: right end of grille and pull out.
ation:nd right end of grille and press in securely.
P88.20-2027-26
WWW.MANUALS
Towing the vehicle
Important!
When towing the vehicle, please, note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the electronic key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking, see page 37.
The rear towbumper. Thepassenger si
Grille removHold left and
Grille installEngage left a
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make certain that the electronic key is in steering lock position 2.
If the electronic key is left in the steering lock position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the lock. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove electronic key from steering lock and reinsert.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS To
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other
Note:
al turns while being towed with hazard warning r in use, turn electronic key in steering lock to n 2 and activate combination switch for left or urn signal in usual manner – only the selected gnal will operate.
anceling the turn signal, the hazard warning r will operate again.
n!
ehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the must be shut off (electronic key in steering lock n 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be d and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Switch off -away alarm (see page 44) as well as the ESP (see
21).
WWW.MANUA273wing
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
types of towing.
The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). The electronic key must be in steering lock position 2.
To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports.
Use wheel lift, dolly, or flat bed equipment, with electronic key in steering lock turned to position 0.
To signflashepositioright tturn si
Upon cflashe
Cautio
If the venginepositioengagethe towpage 2
Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the braking and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
274Towing
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
rt a pin (1), e.g. ball point pen, into the ing below the position “D” of the shift le pushing the pin down, move selector sition “P”.
l of the pin from the opening, the cover will y. Only after moving the selector lever to ” and “D–” does the cover return to its
on.
WWW.MANUALS
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking
In the case of power failure the transmission selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
To do so, insecovered openpattern. Whilever from po
After removanot close fullpositions “D+closed positi
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ex
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Exterior lamps To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off lamp prior to replacing a bulb.
replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with ecified watt rating.
replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a loth.
ing!
se of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is rous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp s components. We recommend that you have work done by a qualified technician.
WWW.MANUA275terior lamps
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Headlamp adjustment
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Check and readjust headlamps at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced.
For adjusting headlamp aim see page 280.
Replacing bulbs
When the sp
When portionclean c
Warning!
Bulbs and bulb holder can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you:
• touch or move it when hot,
• drop the bulb,
• scratch the bulb.
Wear eye and hand protection.
Warn
Becaudangeand itsuch
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
276Exterior lamps
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ssembly (Xenon)
et for turn signal lamp
l connector for low beam headlamp bulb
l connector for high beam headlamp bulb
et for parking and standing lamp
4
6
7
3
P82.10-2395-26
5
1
WWW.MANUALS
Headlamp assembly (Halogen)
1 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
2 Cover for low beam headlamp
3 Cover for high beam headlamp, parking and standing lamp
Headlamp a
4 Bulb sock
5 Electrica
6 Electrica
7 Bulb sock
P82.10-2394-26
41
5 6
72
3
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ex
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Bulbs for low or high BeamH7 (55 W)
Turn signal lamp1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp bulb)
ood.
bulb socket (4) counterclockwise and pull out. ulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and
e.
new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. all bulb socket. Reinstall lamp assembly until ly seated.
g and standing lamp(6 W bulb)
ood.
cover (3) counterclockwise and remove.
bulb socket (7) counterclockwise and pull out. ulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and
e.
new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. all bulb socket. Reinstall lamp assembly until ly seated.
all cover (3).
WWW.MANUA277terior lamps
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Open hood.
Rotate cover (2 or 3) counterclockwise and remove. Pull off electrical connector (5 or 6). Unhook clamping ring and remove bulb.
Insert new bulb (seating properly in cutouts of bulb socket), mount clamping ring. Reinstall and push electrical connector on securely.
Reinstall cover (2 or 3).
Xenon (optional)Bulb for low beam
Open h
Twist Push bremov
Insert Reinstproper
ParkinH 6W
Open h
Rotate
Twist Push bremov
Insert Reinstproper
Reinst
Warning!
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
278Exterior lamps
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
side:lamp (21 W/32 cp bulb)
amp (21 W/32 cp bulb)
cket counterclockwise and pull out. Push ket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
ulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. b socket. Close cover (bulbs 1, 2 and 3).
P82.10-2083-26
4
5
WWW.MANUALS
Taillamp assemblies
Open trunk lid.
Swing cover aside (bulbs 1, 2 and 3).
1 Turn signal lamp (21 W/24 cp bulb)
2 Stop, tail, parking, and side marker lamp (21/4 W bulb)
3 Tail and parking lamp (5 W/4 cp bulb)
4 Driver’s Rear fog
5 Backup l
Twist bulb sobulb into soc
Insert new bReinstall bul
1
23
P82.10-2080-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ex
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Side marker lamp, front (5 W/4 cp bulb) Carefully slide lamp towards front (arrow), and remove back and first.
bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out. Push ocket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. all bulb socket, push in and twist clockwise.
stall lamp, set front end of lamp in bumper and k end snap into place.
WWW.MANUA279terior lamps
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Twist bulb s
Insert Reinst
To reinlet bac
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
280Exterior lamps
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
eadlamp aim
lamp adjustment is extremely important. readjust a headlamp, follow steps 1
adjustments simultaneously aim the high
hould have a normal trunk load.
icle on level surface approximately 25 ft. om a vertical test screen or wall. The e of the vehicle must be at a 90° angle to creen.
WWW.MANUALS
High mounted stop lamp,Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror
The high mounted stop lamp (3rd brake lamp), and the additional turn signals on the exterior mirrors are equipped with LEDs.
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if a fault or defect occurs.
Adjusting h
Correct headTo check andthrough 5.
Please note:
• Low beambeam.
• Vehicle s
1. Park veh(7.6 m) frcenterlinthe test s
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ex
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
w beams off):
asure the vertical height from the floor to erence point (10) on high beam lens. Subtract prox. 2 inches (53 mm) from measurement, and rk a horizontal centerline (9) on the test screen at resulting height from the floor. It must be at a ° angle to the vertical centerline.
en hood.
10
N82.10-2396-26
WWW.MANUA281terior lamps
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
2. (Low beams on):
Using a carpenter’s level, align and mark a vertical centerline (8) on the test screen using the vertex of the angle formed in each beam image. As a check, the distance between centerlines should be 49 1/4 inches (1250 mm). If the distance does not check, have the system verified at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
3. (Lo
Merefapmathe90
4. Op
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
282Exterior lamps
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
eadlamp aim (low beams on):
sting screw (1) (counterclockwise to adjust downward, clockwise upward) until the s illuminate the test screen as shown. The
the angle formed in each beam image ign with the vertical and horizontal es (8 and 9).
nd right headlamps must be adjusted lly.
ssible to obtain a proper headlamp ave the system checked at your authorized
nz Center.
WWW.MANUALS
5. Vertical h
Turn adjuheadlampheadlampvertex ofshould alcenterlin
The left aindividua
Note:
If it is not poadjustment, hMercedes-Be
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ele
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Changing batteries in the electronic main key
ing batteries
ocking tab (3) in direction of right arrow and e mechanical key (4, left arrow).
P80.35-2029-26
4
3
WWW.MANUA283ctronic main key
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Transmit buttons
2 Lamp for battery check and function control
Checking batteries
If one of the transmit buttons (1) is pressed, the battery check lamp (2) lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are in order.
Change batteries if the battery check lamp (2) does not light up briefly.
Chang
Move lremov
P80.20-2201-26
1
2
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
284Electronic main key
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ries (7), inserting new ones under contact th plus (+) side facing up.
ry compartment into housing until locked slide mechanical key back into electronic
P80.35-2027-26
7
8
WWW.MANUALS
Insert mechanical key (4) in side opening (5) to open latch. Press briefly (do not use mechanical key as lever) to release battery compartment.
Remove mechanical key from side opening.
Carefully remove battery compartment in direction of arrow (6).
Change battespring (8) wi
Return battein place and main key.
P80.35-2025-26
54
6
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ele
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Important! Synchronizing remote control
mote control may have to be resynchronized, if hicle cannot be locked or unlocked.
chronize insert electronic key in steering lock.
mote control should once again be operational.
WWW.MANUA285ctronic main key
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation on battery package.
Replacement Battery: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.
The rethe ve
To syn
The re
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
286Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
oof closed or to raise the roof at the rear: ockwise.
oof open or to lower the roof at the rear: unterclockwise.
pward while turning it, to disengage the r.
WWW.MANUALS
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the lens of the left interior lamp between the sun visors.
1. Pry off lens (1) by using a screw driver.
2. Remove cover (2).
3. Obtain crank (3) (supplied with vehicle) and insert it through hole.
To slide the rturn crank cl
To slide the rturn crank co
Note:
Push crank uelectric moto
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ma
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Manual release for fuel filler flap Replacing wiper blade insert
fety reasons, remove electronic key from steering fore replacing the wiper blade, otherwise the
can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward.
allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield ithout a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be ed or broken.
certain that the wiper blade is properly installed. properly installed wiper blade may cause hield damage.
WWW.MANUA287nual release for fuel filler flap
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
The manual release knob is located behind the right side trunk panel.
In case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap, pull the manual release knob while simultaneously opening the fuel filler flap.
For salock bemotor
Notes:
Do not
Do notglass wscratch
Make An imwinds
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
288Replacing wiper blade insert
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
on of arrow) wiper blade insert into s until tabs are engaged.
blade between tabs (3) on the wiper arm, end of wiper arm. Press safety tab upward
in place.
WWW.MANUALS
Removal:
Fold wiper arm forward. Press safety tab down (1), push wiper blade downward (2) and remove.
Place wiper blade on firm support. Press down both tabs and slide (direction of arrow) the wiper blade insert out of the retainer claws.
Installation:
Slide (directiretainer claw
Insert wiper and slide intountil it locks
3
2
1
P82.30-0333-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Tr
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Trunk lamp Roof rack
ly those roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz to amage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s
ation instructions.
supports only between markings which are on the rubber molding.
WWW.MANUA289unk lamp
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
If the trunk is to remain open for a long period of time, the trunk lamp can be switched off by pulling out the plunger in the switch (arrow). This prevents the vehicle battery from being discharged.
When the trunk lid is closed, the switch will reset and turn on the lamp next time the lid is opened.
Use onavoid dinstall
Mountvisible
P82.20-2029-26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
S
WWW.MANUALS.W
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS 291Contents – Vehicle care
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ………………………..292
Power washer …………………………293Tar stains ……………………………….293Paintwork, painted body components ……………………………293Engine cleaning ……………………..294Vehicle washing …………………….294Ornamental moldings …………….294Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses ………………….294
Window cleaning ………………….. 295Wiper blade ………………………….. 295Light alloy wheels ………………… 295Instrument cluster ………………… 295Steering wheel and gear selector lever ………………… 295Cup holder ……………………………. 296Seat belts ………………………………. 296Hard plastic trim items …………. 296Headliner and shelf below rear window ………………………….. 296Upholstery ……………………………. 296Plastic and rubber parts ……….. 296
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
292Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
t washings are necessary to deal with onditions; for example, near the ocean, in
eas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during tion.
heck your vehicle from time to time for g or other damage. Any damage should be oon as possible to prevent the start of
o not neglect the underside of the vehicle. te for a thorough check is a washing of the llowed by a thorough inspection. Damaged be reundercoated.
has been treated at the factory with a wax-ofing in the body cavities which will last for f the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
ssary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz e possibility of incompatibility between d in the production process and others
.
cted car-care products and compiled tions which are specially matched to our which always reflect the latest technology. in Mercedes-Benz approved car-care our authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
WWW.MANUALS
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt, tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences.
More frequenunfavorable cindustrial arwinter opera
You should cstone chippinrepaired as scorrosion.
In doing so, dA prerequisiunderbody foareas need to
Your vehicle base rustprothe lifetime oneither necebecause of thmaterials useapplied later
We have selerecommendavehicles andYou can obtaproducts at y
Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Cle
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed
Tar stains
y remove tar stains before they dry and become ifficult to remove. A tar remover is
mended.
ork, painted body components
des-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied ater drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”,
lly in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and g detergent used.
des-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be d if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding ss of gloss).
apply any of these products or wax if your is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.
e appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and ional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips tones, vehicle doors etc.).
WWW.MANUA293aning and care of the vehicle
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.
Additional information can be found in the booklet titled “Vehicle Care Guide”.
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Caution!
Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Quicklmore drecom
Paintw
Mercewhen wnormawashin
Merceapplie(i.e. lo
Do notvehicle
Use thprovisfrom s
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
294Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt ssible.
g the underbody, do not forget to clean the f the wheels.
moldings
leaning and care of very dirty chrome- use a chrome cleaner.
taillamps, turn signal lenses
r wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz r Shampoo, with plenty of water.
ratches, never apply strong force and use on-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. pt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or
WWW.MANUALS
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish.
In the winteras soon as po
When washininner sides o
Ornamental
For regular cplated parts,
Headlamps,
Use a mild caapproved Ca
To prevent sconly a soft, nDo not attemsponge.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Cle
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Window cleaning Light alloy wheels
des-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for r cleaning of the light alloy wheels.
ible, clean wheels once a week with des-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft brush and a strong spray of water.
instructions on container.
ly acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could corrosion.
ment cluster
gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent icate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a oistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
ng agents.
ng wheel and gear selector lever
ith a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean ercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
WWW.MANUA295aning and care of the vehicle
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
Note:
For safety reasons, switch off wiper and remove electronic key from steering lock before cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Wiper blade
Clean the wiper blade rubber with a clean cloth and detergent solution.
Note:
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from steering lock before cleaning the wiper blade, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Merceregula
If possMercebristle
Follow
Note:
Use onlead to
Instru
Use a for delcloth mscouri
Steeri
Wipe wwith M
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
296Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
nd shelf below rear window
oft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo se of excessive dirt.
arket seat covers or wearing clothing that ency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet se the upholstery to become permanently y lining the seats with a proper cover, contact-discoloration will be
olstery upholstery with a damp cloth and dry r clean with Mercedes-Benz approved . Exercise particular care when cleaning ather as its underside should not become
lsteryes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft and apply with light pressure.
rubber parts
l or wax on these parts.
WWW.MANUALS
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
Headliner a
Clean with scleaner in ca
Upholstery
Using aftermhave the tendetc.) may caudiscolored. Bintermediateprevented.
Leather UphWipe leatherthoroughly oLeather Careperforated lewet.
MB Tex UphoPour Mercedlint-free cloth
Plastic and
Do not use oi
Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS 297Contents – Technical data
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Technical data
Spare parts service ……………………298Warranty coverage …………………….298Identification labels …………………..299Layout of poly-V-belt drive …………300Technical data …………………………..301Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. –
capacities ……………………………..305Engine oils ………………………………..307
Engine oil additives …………………. 307Air conditioner
refrigerant …………………………… 307Brake fluid ……………………………….. 307Premium unleaded
gasoline ……………………………….. 308Fuel requirements …………………… 308Gasoline additives ……………………. 309Coolants …………………………………… 309Consumer information ……………… 311
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
298Technical data
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
verage
is covered under the terms of the printed in the Service and Warranty booklet and your authorized nz Center will exchange or repair any ts originally installed on the vehicle in ith the terms of the following warranties:
icle limited warranty
system warranty
performance warranty
a, Massachusetts, and Vermont emission ystems warranty
parts and accessories are covered by the nz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties, ich are available at any Mercedes-Benz
ice and Warranty Information Booklet
ose your Service and Warranty Information your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center replacement. It will be mailed to you.
WWW.MANUALS
Spare parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of original spare parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts, for other Mercedes-Benz models, are available.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should be installed.
Important!
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle or compromise its durability or safety.
Warranty co
Your vehicle “warranties”Information Mercedes-Bedefective paraccordance w
1. New veh
2. Emission
3. Emission
4. Californicontrol s
ReplacementMercedes-Becopies of whCenter.
Loss of Serv
Should you lbooklet, havearrange for a
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Identification labels
hicle Identification Number (VIN)
ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle ication and engine numbers.
XXXX
XXXX
X
2
WWW.MANUA299chnical data
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
1 Certification label 2 Ve
When identif
1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
300Technical data
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ly-V-belt drive
c belt tensioner
ft
itioner compressor
ump
r (alternator)
ley
ering pump
WWW.MANUALS
3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
4 Engine number
5 Body number and paintwork number
6 Emission control label
7 Information label, California versionVacuum line routing for emission control system
Layout of po
1 Automati
2 Cranksha
3 Air cond
4 Coolant p
5 Generato
6 Idler pul
7 Power ste
6
5
7
3
4
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Technical data
CLK 55 AMG (208.374)1
113
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
8
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
322.0 cu.in. (5439 cm3)
10.5:1
342 hp/5500 rpm(255 kW/5500 rpm)
376 ft.lb/3000 rpm(510 Nm/3000 rpm)
6000 rpm
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
2390 mm
enz
WWW.MANUA301chnical data
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Model CLK 430 (208.370)1
Engine 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm)
Stroke 3.30 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 260.3 cu.in. (4265 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 275 hp/5750 rpm(205 kW/5750 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 295 ft.lb/3200 rpm(400 Nm/3200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2390 mm
1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-BCenter for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
302Technical data
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ible 225/45 R 17 91 W.
ible 245/40 R 17 91 W.3
1
WWW.MANUALS
Rims – Tires
1 Also permissible 225/45 ZR 17.
2 Also permissible 245/40 ZR 17.3
3 Must not be used with snow chains.
4 Also permiss
5 Also permiss
Model CLK 430 CLK 55 AMG
Rims front axle(AMG light alloy)Wheel offset
71/2 J x 17 H 21.46 in (37 mm)
71/2 J x 17 H 21.46 in (37 mm)
Rims rear axle(AMG light alloy)Wheel offset
81/2 J x 17 H 21.18 in (30 mm)
81/2 J x 17 H 21.18 in (30 mm)
Radial-ply tiresSummer tires, front axle:Summer tires, rear axle:
225/45 R 17 91 W1
245/40 R 17 91 W2, 3225/45 ZR 174
245/40 ZR 175, 3
Spare wheel
Rim (light alloy)Wheel offset
71/2 J x 17 H 21.46 in (37 mm)
71/2 J x 17 H 21.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tire:Radial-ply tires 225/45 R 17 91 W1 225/45 R 17 91 W
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Te
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Rims – Winter tires
G
2m)
91 W M+S
G
PER
mm) (20 – 30 Nm)
WWW.MANUA303chnical data
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Electrical system
Model CLK 430 CLK 55 AM
Rim (light alloy)Wheel offset
7 J x 16 H 21.46 in (37 mm)
71/2 J x 17 H1.46 in (37 m
Winter tires:Radial-ply tires 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17
Model CLK 430 CLK 55 AM
Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A
Starter motor 12V/1.7 kW 12V/1.7 kW
Battery 12V/100 Ah 12V/100 Ah
Spark plugs
Electrode gapTightening torque
Bosch F 8 DPERBeru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 20.039 in (1.0 mm)15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
Bosch F 8 D
0.039 in (1.015 – 22 ft.lb
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
304Technical data
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
)
)
)
)
)
)
WWW.MANUALS
Main dimensions
Weights (see certification tag)
Model CLK 430 CLK 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length 179.8 in (4567 mm) 179.8 in (4567 mm
Overall vehicle width 67.8 in (1722 mm) 67.8 in (1722 mm
Overall height 54.6 in (1386 mm) 54.6 in (1386 mm
Wheel base 105.9 in (2690 mm) 105.9 in (2690 mm
Track, front 59.3 in (1505 mm) 59.3 in (1505 mm
Track, rear 58.6 in (1488 mm) 58.6 in (1488 mm
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Fu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. – capacities
refore use only brands tested and recommended let, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Recommended engine oils
Automatic transmission fluid
Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
l) MB Power steering fluid
ach High temperature roller bearing grease
l) MB Brake fluid (DOT 4)
l) MB Windshield washer concentrate “S” 1
1 l) MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze
ezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and ratures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see
WWW.MANUA305els, coolants, lubricants etc. — capacities
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Theby us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamph
Model Capacity
Engine with oil filter CLK 430CLK 55 AMG
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
Automatic transmission 9.6 US qt (9.1 l)
Rear axle 1.4 US qt (1.3 l)
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0
Front wheel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) e
Brake system approx. 0.5 US qt (0.5
Windshield/headlamp washer system
approx. 7.4 US qt (7.0
Cooling system approx. 11.7 US qt (11.
1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above frecommercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for tempeWindshield/headlamp washer system on page 256.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
306Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. — capacities
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
Premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
R-134a refrigerant and special PAC lubricant (Never R-12)
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
WWW.MANUALS
Fuel tank includinga reserve of
approx. 16.4 US gal (62.0 l)approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l)
Air conditioner system
Model Capacity
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Fu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Engine oils Air conditioner refrigerant
(HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil in the air conditioner system.
use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, ise damage to the system will occur.
fluid
vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake continuously reduced through the absorption of re from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard ing conditions, this moisture content can lead to mation of bubbles in the system thus reducing tem’s efficiency.
ake fluid must therefore be replaced every two preferably in the spring.
commended to use only brake fluid approved by des-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ovide you with additional information.
WWW.MANUA307els, coolants, lubricants etc.
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be harmful to the engine operation.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
R-134ais used
Never otherw
Brake
Duringfluid ismoistuoperatthe forthe sys
The bryears,
It is reMercewill pr
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
308Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ments
mium unleaded meeting ASTM 39:
umber (posted at the pump) must be an average of both the Research (R) octane the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2). nown as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
oline containing oxygenates such as IBA and TBA can be used provided the ne of these oxygenates to gasoline does not MTBE not to exceed 15%.
ethanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% al cosolvents.
es of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. ch contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded be used.
must also meet all other fuel requirements tance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor .
WWW.MANUALS
Premium unleaded gasoline
Caution!
To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
• have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible,
• avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration,
• do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage,
• do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain.
Fuel require
Use only Prestandard D 4
The octane n91 min. It is number and This is also k
Unleaded gasEthanol, IPA,ratio of any oexceed 10%,
The ratio of Mplus addition
Using mixturGasohol, whigasoline, can
These blendssuch as resispressure etc.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Fu
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Gasoline additives Coolants
gine coolant is a mixture of water and rrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
rosion protection,
eze protection,
iling protection (by increasing the boiling point).
oling system was filled at the factory with a t providing freeze protection to approximately (-30°C) and corrosion protection.
ntifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
olant solution must be used year round to provide cessary corrosion protection and increase in the er protection. You should have it replaced every s.
vide the important corrosion protection, the n must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze s a freeze protection to approx. — 22°F [-30°C]). If e a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/eze (freeze protection to approx. — 49°F [-45°C]),
WWW.MANUA309els, coolants, lubricants etc.
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
• warm-up hesitation,
• unstable idle,
• knocking/pinging,
• misfire,
• power loss.
Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel. They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be harmful to the engine operation.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The enantico
• cor
• fre
• bo
The cocoolan-22°F
If the aboilingsystem
The cothe neboil-ov3 year
To prosolutio(equalyou usantifre
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
310Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
art of the winter season (or once a year in ern regions), you should have the /antifreeze concentration checked. The o regularly checked each time you bring to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
/antifreeze quantity
Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F(– 37°C)
– 49°F(– 45°C)
5.9 US qt(5.6 l)
6.5 US qt(6.1 l)
WWW.MANUALS
the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If your are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
Before the stthe hot southanticorrosioncoolant is alsyour vehicle for service.
Anticorrosion
Model
CLK 430, CLK 55 AMG
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Co
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Consumer information Treadwear
adwear grade is a comparative rating based on ar rate of the tire when tested under controlled ions on a specified government test course. For le, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire 100. The relative performance of tires depends he actual conditions of their use, however, and epart significantly from the norm due to ons in driving habits, service practices and nces in road characteristics and climate.
WWW.MANUA311nsumer information
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
This has been prepared as required of all manufactures of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
The trethe weconditexamp(1 1/2) gradedupon tmay dvariatidiffere
Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
312Consumer information
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ture grades are A (the highest), B, and C, the tire’s resistance to the generation of bility to dissipate heat when tested under nditions on a specified indoor laboratory ustained high temperature can cause the e tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
e temperature can lead to sudden tire rade C corresponds to a level of which all passenger vehicle tires must he Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard es B and A represent higher levels of
on the laboratory test wheel than the quired by law.
ature grade for this tire is established at is properly inflated and not Excessive speed, underinflation, or ading, either separately or in n, can cause excessive heat build up e tire failure.
WWW.MANUALS
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature
The temperarepresentingheat and its acontrolled cotest wheel. Smaterial of thand excessivfailure. The gperformancemeet under tNo. 109. Gradperformanceminimum re
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Warning!
The temperfor a tire thoverloaded.excessive locombinatioand possibl
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ind
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Index AshtrayCenter console, front …………………………………………157
r seats ………………………………………………………….158systemi-theft system ………………………………………………. 131ton and soft key operation ……………………………132sette mode ……………………………………………………137changer ……………………………………………………….. 141mode ……………………………………………………………140rating and display elements ………………………..130rating safety ………………………………………………..129ration …………………………………………………………..133ration — audio and telephone ………………………129io mode ……………………………………………………….135phone operation ………………………………………….144systems ………………………………………………………….95sette player ……………………………………………………97player …………………………………………………………….96io …………………………………………………………………..95atic central locking ……………………………………….37atic climate control ……………………………………..122distribution ………………………………………………….126recirculation ………………………………………………..127volume …………………………………………………………126
WWW.MANUA313ex
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
A
ABS (Antilock brake system) ………………………………… 217Malfunction indicator lamp ……………………………….231
ABS-SYSTEM — malfunction and warning messages ……………………………………..236
Adjusting headlamp aim ………………………………………..280Adjusting telescoping steering column ……………………78Air conditioner refrigerant …………………………………….307Air distribution ……………………………………………………..126Air volume …………………………………………………………….126Airbag deactivation system ……………………………………..65Airbag OFF indicator lamp …………………………………….232Airbags ……………………………………………………………………67Alarm system ……………………………………………………. 42, 44Anticorrosion/antifreeze ………………..210, 255, 305, 309Antiglare night position ………………………………………….79Antilock brake system (ABS) ………………………………… 217
Malfunction indicator lamp ……………………………….231Antitheft alarm system ……………………………………………42Aquaplaning ………………………………………………………….207
ReaAudio
AntButCasCD CD OpeOpeOpeOpeRadTele
Audio CasCD Rad
AutomAutom
Air Air Air
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
314Index
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
………………………………………………………….. 268cycling ……………………………………………… 269TERNATOR — malfunction and warning
…………………………………………………………. 235 ………………………………………………………….. 211ST — malfunction and warning messages ..
system (BAS) …………………………………….. 215on indicator lamp ……………………………….231……………………………………………204, 229, 307………………………………………………………….. 305D — malfunction and warning messages ….
G WEAR — malfunction and warning …………………………………………………………. 237ar …………………………………………………….. 237g lamp …………………………………………….. 229
d low ………………………………………………… 229…………………………………… 202, 204, 215, 220
lants, lubricants etc. ………………………… 305……………………………………………………………160structions ………………………………………….162
WWW.MANUALS
Basic setting ……………………………………………………..124Defogging windows …………………………………………..125Defrosting ………………………………………………………….125Display and controls ………………………………………….124Dust filter ………………………………………………………….128Economy ……………………………………………………………125Rear window defroster ………………………………………126Residual engine heat utilization (REST) ……………127Special settings …………………………………………………125
Automatic transmission ……………………………………….. 193Emergency Operation ……………………………………….201Fluid level ………………………………………………………….254Program mode selector switch ………………………….200Selector lever position ………………………………………. 196Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking ………………………………………274
B
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system …………………65Self-test ……………………………………………………………….65
Backrest, front seat ………………………………………………….54BAS (Brake assist system) …………………………………….. 215
Malfunction indicator lamp ……………………………….231
Battery ……..Battery re
BATTERY/ALmessages
Block heaterBRAKE ASSI
236Brake assist
MalfunctiBrake fluid .
Capacity .BRAKE FLUI
237BRAKE LININ
messagesBrake pad weBrake warnin
Brake fluiBrakes ………
C
CapacitiesFuels, coo
Cargo area ..Loading in
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ind
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Cargo tie-down rings …………………………………………….. 163Catalytic converter ……………………………………………….. 178
COOLANT (coolant level) — malfunction and warning messages ………………… 239
t leveling coolant …………………………………………………. 255cking ………………………………………………………….. 254NT TEMP. (coolant temperature) —
function and warning messages ………………… 240t temperature gauge ……………………………………..88ts ……………………………………………………………….. 309icorrosion/antifreeze quantity …………………… 309 control ………………………………………………………..212lderter console, front …………………………………………155r bench armrest ……………………………………………156
e running lamps ………………………………………… 117atering instructions ………………………………………….210
AY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) — function and warning messages ………………… 234AY DEFECTIVE (several systems) — function and warning messages ………………… 234y illumination ………………………………………………..87
WWW.MANUA315ex
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Cellular telephone ………………………………………………… 165Center console …………………………………………………………20Central locking switch …………………………………………….36Central locking system ……………………………………………28
Automatic central locking …………………………………..37Choosing global or selective mode ……………………… 31Electronic main key …………………………………………….25Electronic reserve key …………………………………………26Locking and unlocking ……………………………………….30Mechanical keys ………………………………………………….33Remote control ……………………………………………………28
Changing wheels …………………………………………………..262CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp …………228Check regularly and before a long trip ………………….225Checking engine oil level
Via engine oil level indicator ……………………………..114Via oil dipstick …………………………………………………..253
Child restraint ……………………………………….50, 58, 64, 75Cleaning and care of the vehicle ……………………………292COMAND, radio and telephone ………………………………176Combination switch ……………………………………………….119Consumer information ……………………………………………311Control and operation of radio transmitters …………..176
CoolanAddChe
COOLAmal
CoolanCoolan
AntCruiseCup ho
CenRea
D
DaytimDeep w
DrivDISPL
malDISPL
malDispla
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
316Index
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
trol label ………………………………………….. 300artment ……………………………………………..251 — malfunction ng messages …………………………………….. 238nctionGINE malfunction
or lamp ……………………………………………… 228ditives ……………………………………………… 307nsumption ………………………………………… 115vel…………………………………………………… 114, 253………………………………………………………….. 243LEVEL — malfunction ng messages …………………………………….. 243vel indicator ………………………………………. 114LEVEL NOT WHEN ENGINE ON g) — multifunction indicator ………………. 115………………………………………………………….. 307 ………………………………………………………… 305go area ……………………………………………….160ic stability program) ………… 209, 219, 273itch …………………………………………………..221
on and warning message ………………….. 244on indicator lamp ……………………………….231zing …………………………………………………. 220amp ……………………………………………………231
WWW.MANUALS
Doors ……………………………………………………………………….34Drinking and driving …………………………………………….203Drive sensibly — save fuel ……………………………………….203Driving instructions ………………………………………………203Driving off ……………………………………………………………..205
E
ELEC. STABIL. PROGR. — malfunction and warning messages ………………….244
Electronic main key …………………………………………………25Changing batteries ……………………………………………283Synchronizing remote control …………………………..285
Electronic stability program (ESP) …………………209, 273Control switch …………………………………………………..221Malfunction and warning message ……………………244Malfunction indicator lamp ……………………………….231Synchronizing …………………………………………………..220Warning lamp ……………………………………………………231
Emergency callSee Tele Aid ……………………………………………………… 180
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) …………………….66Emergency trunk lid release button ……………………….. 41Emergency unlocking in case of accident ……………….37Emission control ……………………………………………………179
Emission conEngine compENGINE FAN
and warniEngine malfu
CHECK ENindicat
Engine oil adEngine oil coEngine oil le
Checking Warning .
ENGINE OIL and warni
Engine oil leENGINE OIL
(measurinEngine oils .
CapacitiesEnlarged carESP (Electron
Control swMalfunctiMalfunctiSynchroniWarning l
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ind
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Exterior lamp malfunction and warning message ………………………………………. 241
Fuel filler flapManual release ………………………………………………… 287
quirements ……………………………………………….. 308serve warning ……………………………………………. 230coolants, lubricants etc. — capacities ………….. 305 electrical ……………………………………………………. 249
door opener ……………………………………………….166neitives ………………………………………………………….. 309l requirements …………………………………………… 308mium unleaded ………………………………………….. 308al notes on the central locking system …………..27box ……………………………………………………………….154
warning flasher switch …………………………….. 121estraintsnt …………………………………………………………………… 51r …………………………………………………………………….52oval ………………………………………………………………51
WWW.MANUA317ex
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Exterior lamp switch ………………………………………………116Exterior lamps ……………………………………………………….275
Adjusting headlamp aim ……………………………………280Fog lamps …………………………………………………………..116Headlamps …………………. 116, 241, 242, 276, 280, 294Low and high beam ……………………………………119, 277Parking lamps ……………………………………………116, 277Replacing bulbs …………………………………………………275Side marker lamp, front …………………………………….279Standing lamps …………………………………………..116, 277Taillamp assemblies ………………………………………….278Turn signal lamp ………………………………………..119, 277
F
First aid kit ……………………………………………………………248Flexible service system (FSS) …………………………………111Fuel
Gasoline additives …………………………………………….309Premium unleaded gasoline ……………..223, 306, 308
Fuel cap placement warning ………………………………….230
Fuel reFuel reFuels, Fuses,
G
GarageGasoli
AddFuePre
GenerGlove
H
HazardHead r
FroReaRem
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
318Index
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
……………………………………………………….. 270
……………………………………………………………24
ior …………………………………………………….. 275 …………………………………………………………. 116, adjusting ………………………………………… 280s ………………….. 116, 241, 242, 276, 280, 294igh beam …………………………………….119, 277mp ……………………………………………..116, 277 bulbs ……………………………………………….. 275er lamp, front …………………………………… 279amp …………………………………………….116, 277ssemblies …………………………………..116, 278al lamp ………………………………………..119, 277y-V-belt drive ……………………………………. 300OR — malfunction ng messages …………………………………….. 242
WWW.MANUALS
Headlamp cleaning system …………………………………….118Headlights ………………………………………………………………116Heated seats ……………………………………………………………56Hood ………………………………………………………………………251
I
Identification labels ……………………………………………….299Illuminated vanity mirrors …………………………………….153Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ……………….86Individual settings …………………………………………………108Infant and child restraint systems …………………………..75
Installation ………………………………………………………….77Information call
See Tele Aid ……………………………………………………… 180Instrument cluster …………………………………………………..84
Activating ……………………………………………………………87Indicator lamps …………………………………………………..86
Instrument lamps ……………………………………………………87Instruments and controls ……………………………………….. 18Interior
General notes ……………………………………………………. 153Interior lighting ……………………………………………………. 151
J
Jump starting
K
Keys, vehicle
L
Lamps, exterFog lampsHeadlampHeadlampLow and hParking laReplacingSide markStanding lTaillamp aTurn sign
Layout of polLIGHT SENS
and warni
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ind
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Lighter ………………………………………………………………….. 159LIGHTING SYSTEM — malfunction
ENGINE FAN ……………………………………………………. 238ENGINE OIL LEVEL …………………………………………. 243
HT SENSOR ………………………………………………… 242HTING SYSTEM ……………………………………………241KING BRAKE …………………………………………….. 238OVE KEY ………………………………………………….. 244
ER. WHEEL ADJUST. ………………………………….. 242E AID …………………………………………………………. 246SHER FLUID ……………………………………………….. 245ction message memory ………………………………106l operation of sliding/pop-up roof ……………… 286nical keys ………………………………………………………33ry …………………………………………………………………..48alling ……………………………………………………………..49ing ………………………………………………………….. 48, 81, exterior, adjusting ……………………………………….80, exterior, rear view ……………………………………….80, inside, rear view ………………………………………….79ontour seat …………………………………………………….55unction display ………………………………………………90ine oil level indicator …………………………………….94 (Flexible service system) ……………………………..94ing the audio volume ………………………………….. 110 and main odometer ……………………………………..94icle speed ………………………………………………………94unction steering wheel …………………………………..90
WWW.MANUA319ex
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
and warning messages …………………………………….. 241Limp home mode (Automatic transmission) ………….201Loading instructions …………………………………………….. 162Locking and unlocking ……………………………………………30Low engine coolant level warning …………………………239
M
Maintenance ………………………………………………………….177Malfunction and indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster …………………………………..228Malfunction and warning messages ………………………233
ABS-SYSTEM …………………………………………………….236BATTERY/ALTERNATOR ……………………………………235BRAKE ASSIST ………………………………………………….236BRAKE FLUID ……………………………………………………237BRAKE LINING WEAR ………………………………………237COOLANT (coolant level) …………………………………..239COOLANT TEMP. (coolant temperature) ……………240DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
(engine control unit) …………………………………….234DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
(several systems) …………………………………………..234ELEC. STABIL. PROGR. ……………………………………..244
LIGLIGPARREMSTETELWA
MalfunManuaMechaMemo
RecStor
MirrorMirrorMirrorMulticMultif
EngFSSSettTripVeh
Multif
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
320Index
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
ws ………………………………………………………147pening ………………………………………………..148nd closing ……………………………………………32zing …………………………………………………..148
th your vehicle …………………………………….. 14mation ………………………………………………….7
itters ………………………………………………… 176……………………………………………………………120
ng backrest ………………………………………..160irrors……………………………………………………………..80……………………………………………………………..79 defroster …………………………………………..126 sunshade ………………………………………….152ol ………………………………………………………..28placement ………………………………………… 283Y — malfunction ng messages …………………………………….. 244lbs ……………………………………………………. 275per blade insert ……………………………….. 287
WWW.MANUALS
N
Navigation system — Multifunction display …………….103Night security illumination ……………………………………117
O
On-board diagnostic system …………………………………..228Operator’s Manual ……………………………………………………. 8Outside temperature indicator ………………………………..88Overhead control panel …………………………………………… 21
P
Panic button …………………………………………………………….33Parcel net in front passenger footwell ………………….. 164Parking ………………………………………………………………….205Parking brake ………………… 157, 192, 202, 205, 229, 262PARKING BRAKE — malfunction
and warning messages ……………………………………..238Power assistance ……………………………………………………204Power seats, front ……………………………………………………45
Backrest ………………………………………………………………54
Power windoExpress oOpening aSynchroni
Problems wiProduct infor
R
Radio transmRain sensor Rear seats
Split foldiRear view m
Exterior ..Inside …..
Rear windowRear windowRemote contr
Battery reREMOVE KE
and warniReplacing buReplacing wi
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ind
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Reporting Safety Defects ………………………………………… 15Reserve key ……………………………………………………………..26
Sliding/pop-up roof ………………………………………………..149Emergency operation ………………………………………. 286
ress opening ………………………………………………..150ning and closing ……………………………………………32chronizing …………………………………………………..150hains …………………………………………………………. 209ll Tele Aid ………………………………………………………180parts service ………………………………………………. 298wheel ………………………………………………….. 257, 261l settings (Automatic climate control) …………125dicator lamp ………………………………………………. 230alfunction ………………………………………………………68ock-out ……………………………………………………………27g and turning off the engine ……………………….192. WHEEL ADJUST. — malfunction warning messages …………………………………….. 242g column, adjustable …………………………………….78g lock ………………………………………………………….190
e compartmentnk floor ………………………………………………………. 257e compartmentster console …………………………………………………..154
ve box …………………………………………………………..154
WWW.MANUA321ex
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Residual engine heat utilization (REST) ………………..127Roadside assistance ………………………………………………… 10Roadside assistance call
See Tele Aid ……………………………………………………… 180Roof rack ……………………………………………………………….289
S
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning retractor and airbag …………………………..73
Seat belts …………………………………………………………………58Fastening …………………………………………………………….60Seat belt nonusage warning system ……………………59Unfastening …………………………………………………………62Warning lamp ……………………………………………………232
Seat belts and integrated restraint system (SRS) …….58Service indicator
See flexible service system (FSS) ……………………….111Setting the audio volume ………………………………………..110Shelf below rear window ……………………………………….248Side marker lamp ………………………………………………….279Ski sack ………………………………………………………………… 170
ExpOpeSyn
Snow cSOS-ca
SeeSpare Spare SpeciaSRS inSRS mStart lStartinSTEER
andSteerinSteerinStorag
TruStorag
CenGlo
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
322Index
Technicaldata
Instruments and controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practical hints Car care Index
…………………………………………………………..100 book …………………………………………………..98nd two-way radios …………………………….. 176
steering column …………………………………………………………….78lamp …………………………………………………. 232steering column — malfunction ng messages …………………………………….. 2420 miles ……………………………………………..177 pressure …………………………………………. 267
…………………………………………………………. 207…………………………………………………………… 311structions ………………………………………… 206tires …………………………………………………. 302heels ……………………………………………….. 260
ion pressure …………………………………….. 267cement ……………………………………………… 259iving instructions ……………………………… 209rm ……………………………………………………….44ehicle ……………………………………………….. 272 …………………………………………………………193 selector lever,
unlocking …………………………………………..274oad …………………………………………………… 211r ………………………………………………………..104r ………………………………………………………….89
WWW.MANUALS
Storage compartments, armrest and cup holder …………………………………….. 153
Stowing things in the vehicle ………………………………..248Sun visors ……………………………………………………………..152Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ………………………66Synchronizing remote control ……………………………….285
T
Tachometer ……………………………………………………………..89Technical data ……………………………………………………….301
Electrical system ……………………………………………….303Main dimensions ………………………………………………304Rims and tires …………………………………………………..302Weights ……………………………………………………………..304
Tele Aid ………………………………………………………………… 180Emergency calls ……………………………………………….. 181Information ……………………………………………………….185Initiating an emergency call manually ……………..183Roadside Assistance …………………………………………. 184
TELE AID — malfunction and warning messages ……………………………………..246
Telephone ………………………………………………………………..98General notes ……………………………………………………. 164Incoming call ……………………………………………………. 102
Redialing Telephone
Telephones aTelescoping
AdjustingIndicator
Telescoping and warni
The first 1 00Tire inflationTire tractionTires …………
Driving inRims and Rotating wTire inflatTire replaWinter dr
Tow-away alaTowing the vTransmissionTransmission
manually Traveling abrTrip computeTrip odomete
WWW.MANUALS.WS
LS.WS Ind
Technicaldata
Instand
al hints Car care Index
Trunk ………………………………………………………………………38Opening ……………………………………………………………… 31
W
nty coverage ……………………………………………….. 298ER FLUID (headlamp cleaning system) — function and warning messages ………………… 245ng the vehicle …………………………………………….. 294ou should know at the gas station …………….. 223
s …………………………………………………………………. 259t alloy wheels ……………………………………………. 295s and tires …………………………………………………. 302
eels, changing …………………………………………….. 262 to find it ………………………………………………………. 13hield washer/headlamp cleaning systemilling …………………………………………………………… 256 driving ………………………………………………………. 210 driving instructions ………………………………….. 209
bladelacing insert ………………………………………………. 287
WWW.MANUA323ex
ruments controls
Operation Driving Instrument cluster display
Practic
Release switch …………………………………………………….40Trunk lamp ……………………………………………………………289Trunk lid
Emergency release …………………………………………….. 41Release switch …………………………………………………….40
Turn signal failure ………………………………………………….119Turn signals ……………………………………………………………119
V
Vanity mirrors ……………………………………………………….153Vehicle jack ……………………………………………………………258Vehicle tools …………………………………………………………..257
WarraWASH
malWashiWhat yWheel
LighRimWh
WhereWinds
RefWinterWinterWiper
Rep
WWW.MANUALS.WS
.WS
WWW.MANUALS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.00-2730-26
Press time 10/31/00MBUSA/TI
Printed in the U.S.A.
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS Order No. 6515 1251 13 Part No. 208 584 86 83 USA Edition B 2001
23.02.2017
956 просмотров
Руководство по эксплуатации автомобиля Mercedes-Benz CLK 208. В Руководстве по эксплуатации Мерседес бенц CLK 208 подробно описано рабочее место водителя, обслуживание, управление автомобилем, система оповещения и сигнализации автомобиля, самопомощь, уход, техническое устройство.
Скачать Руководство по эксплуатации Mercedes-Benz CLK 208 (144 мб).
или…
с Яндекс Диск
Дорогие друзья!
Если представленный материал принес Вам пользу — поделитесь ссылкой в своих социальных сетях.
Будем Вам бесконечно благодарны.